US20150370228A1 - Determining control actions of decision modules - Google Patents

Determining control actions of decision modules Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20150370228A1
US20150370228A1 US14/746,751 US201514746751A US2015370228A1 US 20150370228 A1 US20150370228 A1 US 20150370228A1 US 201514746751 A US201514746751 A US 201514746751A US 2015370228 A1 US2015370228 A1 US 2015370228A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
time
additional
goal
model
specified
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/746,751
Inventor
Wolf Kohn
Michael Luis Sandoval
Vishnu Vettrivel
Jonathan Cross
Jason Knox
David Talby
Mike Lazarus
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Veritone Alpha Inc
Original Assignee
Atigeo LLC
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Atigeo LLC filed Critical Atigeo LLC
Priority to US14/746,751 priority Critical patent/US20150370228A1/en
Assigned to Atigeo Corp. reassignment Atigeo Corp. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: LAZARUS, MIKE, TALBY, DAVID, CROSS, JONATHAN, KNOX, JASON, KOHN, WOLF, DR., SANDOVAL, MICHAEL LUIS, VETTRIVEL, VISHNU
Assigned to VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VI, INC., VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VII, INC. reassignment VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VI, INC. SECURITY INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ATIGEO CORPORATION
Publication of US20150370228A1 publication Critical patent/US20150370228A1/en
Assigned to VERITONE ALPHA, INC. reassignment VERITONE ALPHA, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ATIGEO CORPORATION
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60LPROPULSION OF ELECTRICALLY-PROPELLED VEHICLES; SUPPLYING ELECTRIC POWER FOR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT OF ELECTRICALLY-PROPELLED VEHICLES; ELECTRODYNAMIC BRAKE SYSTEMS FOR VEHICLES IN GENERAL; MAGNETIC SUSPENSION OR LEVITATION FOR VEHICLES; MONITORING OPERATING VARIABLES OF ELECTRICALLY-PROPELLED VEHICLES; ELECTRIC SAFETY DEVICES FOR ELECTRICALLY-PROPELLED VEHICLES
    • B60L50/00Electric propulsion with power supplied within the vehicle
    • B60L50/50Electric propulsion with power supplied within the vehicle using propulsion power supplied by batteries or fuel cells
    • B60L50/60Electric propulsion with power supplied within the vehicle using propulsion power supplied by batteries or fuel cells using power supplied by batteries
    • B60L11/18
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60WCONJOINT CONTROL OF VEHICLE SUB-UNITS OF DIFFERENT TYPE OR DIFFERENT FUNCTION; CONTROL SYSTEMS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR HYBRID VEHICLES; ROAD VEHICLE DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR PURPOSES NOT RELATED TO THE CONTROL OF A PARTICULAR SUB-UNIT
    • B60W10/00Conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function
    • B60W10/04Conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function including control of propulsion units
    • B60W10/06Conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function including control of propulsion units including control of combustion engines
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60WCONJOINT CONTROL OF VEHICLE SUB-UNITS OF DIFFERENT TYPE OR DIFFERENT FUNCTION; CONTROL SYSTEMS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR HYBRID VEHICLES; ROAD VEHICLE DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR PURPOSES NOT RELATED TO THE CONTROL OF A PARTICULAR SUB-UNIT
    • B60W10/00Conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function
    • B60W10/04Conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function including control of propulsion units
    • B60W10/08Conjoint control of vehicle sub-units of different type or different function including control of propulsion units including control of electric propulsion units, e.g. motors or generators
    • B60W20/106
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B13/00Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion
    • G05B13/02Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric
    • G05B13/04Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric involving the use of models or simulators
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B13/00Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion
    • G05B13/02Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric
    • G05B13/04Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric involving the use of models or simulators
    • G05B13/041Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric involving the use of models or simulators in which a variable is automatically adjusted to optimise the performance
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B17/00Systems involving the use of models or simulators of said systems
    • G05B17/02Systems involving the use of models or simulators of said systems electric
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/04Programme control other than numerical control, i.e. in sequence controllers or logic controllers
    • G05B19/042Programme control other than numerical control, i.e. in sequence controllers or logic controllers using digital processors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/04Programme control other than numerical control, i.e. in sequence controllers or logic controllers
    • G05B19/048Monitoring; Safety
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06NCOMPUTING ARRANGEMENTS BASED ON SPECIFIC COMPUTATIONAL MODELS
    • G06N5/00Computing arrangements using knowledge-based models
    • G06N5/04Inference or reasoning models
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06NCOMPUTING ARRANGEMENTS BASED ON SPECIFIC COMPUTATIONAL MODELS
    • G06N5/00Computing arrangements using knowledge-based models
    • G06N5/04Inference or reasoning models
    • G06N5/043Distributed expert systems; Blackboards
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06NCOMPUTING ARRANGEMENTS BASED ON SPECIFIC COMPUTATIONAL MODELS
    • G06N5/00Computing arrangements using knowledge-based models
    • G06N5/04Inference or reasoning models
    • G06N5/045Explanation of inference; Explainable artificial intelligence [XAI]; Interpretable artificial intelligence
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/06Resources, workflows, human or project management; Enterprise or organisation planning; Enterprise or organisation modelling
    • G06Q10/063Operations research, analysis or management
    • G06Q10/0631Resource planning, allocation, distributing or scheduling for enterprises or organisations
    • G06Q10/06315Needs-based resource requirements planning or analysis
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q20/00Payment architectures, schemes or protocols
    • G06Q20/38Payment protocols; Details thereof
    • G06Q20/40Authorisation, e.g. identification of payer or payee, verification of customer or shop credentials; Review and approval of payers, e.g. check credit lines or negative lists
    • G06Q20/401Transaction verification
    • G06Q20/4016Transaction verification involving fraud or risk level assessment in transaction processing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q50/00Systems or methods specially adapted for specific business sectors, e.g. utilities or tourism
    • G06Q50/06Electricity, gas or water supply
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60WCONJOINT CONTROL OF VEHICLE SUB-UNITS OF DIFFERENT TYPE OR DIFFERENT FUNCTION; CONTROL SYSTEMS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR HYBRID VEHICLES; ROAD VEHICLE DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR PURPOSES NOT RELATED TO THE CONTROL OF A PARTICULAR SUB-UNIT
    • B60W2510/00Input parameters relating to a particular sub-units
    • B60W2510/06Combustion engines, Gas turbines
    • B60W2510/0666Engine power
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60WCONJOINT CONTROL OF VEHICLE SUB-UNITS OF DIFFERENT TYPE OR DIFFERENT FUNCTION; CONTROL SYSTEMS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR HYBRID VEHICLES; ROAD VEHICLE DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR PURPOSES NOT RELATED TO THE CONTROL OF A PARTICULAR SUB-UNIT
    • B60W2510/00Input parameters relating to a particular sub-units
    • B60W2510/08Electric propulsion units
    • B60W2510/085Power
    • B60W2510/086Power change rate
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B2219/00Program-control systems
    • G05B2219/20Pc systems
    • G05B2219/26Pc applications
    • G05B2219/2639Energy management, use maximum of cheap power, keep peak load low
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02TCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES RELATED TO TRANSPORTATION
    • Y02T10/00Road transport of goods or passengers
    • Y02T10/60Other road transportation technologies with climate change mitigation effect
    • Y02T10/70Energy storage systems for electromobility, e.g. batteries
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S903/00Hybrid electric vehicles, HEVS
    • Y10S903/902Prime movers comprising electrical and internal combustion motors
    • Y10S903/903Prime movers comprising electrical and internal combustion motors having energy storing means, e.g. battery, capacitor
    • Y10S903/93Conjoint control of different elements

Definitions

  • FIG. 1 is a network diagram illustrating an example environment in which a system for performing cooperative distributed control of target systems may be configured and initiated.
  • FIG. 2 is a network diagram illustrating an example environment in which a system for performing cooperative distributed control of target systems may be implemented.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating example computing systems suitable for executing an embodiment of a system for performing cooperative distributed control of target systems in configured manners.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a Collaborative Distributed Decision (CDD) System routine.
  • CDD Collaborative Distributed Decision
  • FIGS. 5A-5B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Decision Module Construction routine.
  • FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a decision module routine.
  • FIGS. 7A-7B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Control Action Determination routine.
  • FIGS. 8A-8B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Coordinated Control Management routine.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a routine for a target system being controlled.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a network diagram of a portion of a distributed architecture of an example CDI system.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a network diagram of a portion of an example Rules Builder component.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a network diagram of example sub-components of an example Rules Builder component.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a network diagram of interactions of portions of a Rules Builder component with an executing agent.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a network diagram of interactions of portions of a Rules Builder component with chattering components.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a diagram of a sliding window for use with chattering.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a diagram of using Lebesgue integration to approximate a control trajectory for chattering.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates a diagram of various interactions of different portions of a CDI system.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates a diagram of example different types of rules.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates an example user interface related to medical/clinical auto-coding.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a diagram of some components of a CU system.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a diagram of performing Pareto processing for use with mean field techniques.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a network diagram of an example decision module agent.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a network diagram of an example of offline workflows for knowledge capture.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a network diagram of an example of workflows for mean field computation and Pareto Optimal.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a network diagram of an example of an automated control system for a home solar micro-grid electrical generating system.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates a diagram of workflow and components of a portion of a CDI system.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates a diagram of a workflow for an inference process portion of a CDI system.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates a diagram of an overview workflow for a portion of a CDI system.
  • FIGS. 29A-29K illustrate examples of using a CDI system to iteratively determine near-optimal solutions over time for controlling a target system.
  • a target system to be controlled or otherwise manipulated may have numerous elements that are inter-connected in various manners, with a subset of those elements being inputs or other control elements that a corresponding automated control system may modify or otherwise manipulate in order to affect the operation of the target system.
  • a target system may further have one or more outputs that the manipulations of the control elements affect, such as if the target system is producing or modifying physical goods or otherwise producing physical effects.
  • an embodiment of a Collaborative Distributed Decision (CDD) system may use the described techniques to perform various automated activities involved in constructing and implementing the automated control system—a brief introduction to some aspects of the activities of the CDD system is provided here, with additional details included below.
  • CDD Collaborative Distributed Decision
  • the CDD system may in some embodiments implement a Decision Module Construction component that interacts with one or more users to obtain a description of a target system, including restrictions related to the various elements of the target system, and one or more goals to be achieved during control of the target system—the Decision Module Construction component then performs various automated actions to generate, test and deploy one or more executable decision modules (also referred to at times as “decision elements” and/or “agents”) to use in performing the control of the target system.
  • a Decision Module Construction component that interacts with one or more users to obtain a description of a target system, including restrictions related to the various elements of the target system, and one or more goals to be achieved during control of the target system—the Decision Module Construction component then performs various automated actions to generate, test and deploy one or more executable decision modules (also referred to at times as “decision elements” and/or “agents”) to use in performing the control of the target system.
  • the CDD system may further provide various components within or external to the decision modules being executed to manage their control of the target system, such as a Control Action Determination component of each decision module to optimize or otherwise enhance the control actions that the decision module generates, and/or one or more Coordinated Control Management components to coordinate the control actions of multiple decision modules that are collectively performing the control of the target system. Additional details related to such components of the CDD system and their automated operations are included below.
  • an automated control system is generated and provided and used to control a micro-grid electricity facility, such as at a residential location that includes one or more electricity sources (e.g., one or more solar panel grids, one or more wind turbines, etc.) and one or more electricity storage and source mechanisms (e.g., one or more batteries).
  • the automated control system may, for example, operate at the micro-grid electricity facility (e.g., as part of a home automation system), such as to receive requests from the operator of a local electrical grid to provide particular amounts of electricity at particular times, and to control operation of the micro-grid electricity facility by determining whether to accept each such request.
  • control actions may further include selecting which electricity source (e.g., solar panel, battery, etc.) to use to provide the requested electricity, and otherwise the control actions may further include determine to provide electricity being generated to at least one energy storage mechanism (e.g., to charge a battery).
  • Outputs of such a physical system include the electricity being provided to the local electrical grid, and a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, is to maximize profits for the micro-grid electricity facility from providing of the electricity. It will be appreciated that such a physical system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • an automated control system is generated and provided and used to control a vehicle with a motor and in some cases an engine, such as an electrical bicycle in which power may come from a user who is pedaling and/or from a motor powered by a battery and/or an engine.
  • the automated control system may, for example, operate on the vehicle or on the user, such as to control operation of the vehicle by determining whether at a current time to remove energy from the battery to power the motor (and if so to further determine how much energy to remove from the battery) or to instead add excess energy to the battery (e.g., as generated by the engine, and if so to further determine how much energy to generate from the engine; and/or as captured from braking or downhill coasting).
  • Outputs of such a physical system include the effects of the motor to move the vehicle, and a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to move the vehicle at one or more specified speeds with a minimum of energy produced from the battery, and/or to minimize use of fuel by the engine. It will be appreciated that such a physical system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • an automated control system is generated and provided and used to manage product inventory for one or more products at one or more locations, such as a retail location that receives products from one or more product sources (e.g., when ordered or requested by the retail location) and that provides products to one or more product recipients (e.g., when ordered or requested by the recipients).
  • the automated control system may, for example, operate at the retail location and/or at a remote network-accessible location, such as to receive requests from product recipients for products, and to control operation of the product inventory at the one or more locations by selecting at a current time one or more first amounts of one or more products to request from the one or more product sources, and by selecting at the current time one or more second amounts of at least one product to provide to the one or more product recipients.
  • Outputs of such a physical system include products being provided from the one or more locations to the one or more product recipients, and a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to maximize profit of an entity operating the one or more locations while maintaining the inventory at one or more specified levels. It will be appreciated that such a physical system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • an automated control system is generated and provided and used to manage cyber-security for physical computing resources being protected from unauthorized operations and/or to determine a risk level from information provided by or available from one or more information sources.
  • the automated control system may, for example, operate at the location of the computing resources or information sources and/or at a remote network-accessible location, such as to receive information about attempts (whether current or past) to perform operations on computing resources being protected or about information being provided by or available from the one or more information sources, and to control operation of the cyber-security system by determine whether a change in authorization to a specified type of operation is needed and to select one or more actions to take to implement the change in authorization if so determined, and/or to determine whether a risk level exceeds a specified threshold and to select one or more actions to take to mitigate the risk level.
  • a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to minimize unauthorized operations that are performed and/or to minimize the risk level. It will be appreciated that such a target system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • an automated control system is generated and provided and used to manage transactions being performed in one or more financial markets, such as to buy and/or sell physical items or other financial items.
  • the automated control system may, for example, operate at the one or more final markets or at a network-accessible location that is remote from the one or more financial markets, such as to control operation of the transactions performed by determining whether to purchase or sell particular items at particular times and to select one or more actions to initiate transactions to purchase or sell the particular items at the particular times.
  • a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to maximize profit while maintaining risk below a specified threshold. It will be appreciated that such a target system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • an automated control system is generated and provided and used to perform coding for medical procedures, such as to allow billing to occur for medical procedures performed on humans.
  • the automated control system may, for example, operate at a location at which the medical procedures are performed or at a network-accessible location that is remote from such a medical location, such as to control operation of the coding that is performed by selecting particular medical codes to associate with particular medical procedures in specified circumstances.
  • a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to minimize errors in selected medical codes that cause revenue leakage. It will be appreciated that such a target system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • a Collaborative Distributed Decision (CDD) system may in some embodiments use at least some of the described techniques to perform various automated activities involved in constructing and implementing a automated control system for a specified target system, such as to modify or otherwise manipulate inputs or other control elements of the target system that affect its operation (e.g., affect one or more outputs of the target system).
  • An automated control system for such a target system may in some situations have a distributed architecture that provides cooperative distributed control of the target system, such as with multiple decision modules that each control a portion of the target system and that operate in a partially decoupled manner with respect to each other.
  • the various decision modules' operations for the automated control system may be at least partially synchronized, such as by each reaching a consensus with one or more other decision modules at one or more times, even if a fully synchronized convergence of all decision modules at all times is not guaranteed or achieved.
  • the CDD system may in some embodiments implement a Decision Module Construction component that interacts with one or more users to obtain a description of a target system, including restrictions related to the various elements of the target system, and one or more goals to be achieved during control of the target system—the Decision Module Construction component then performs various automated actions to generate, test and deploy one or more executable decision modules to use in performing the control of the target system.
  • a Decision Module Construction component that interacts with one or more users to obtain a description of a target system, including restrictions related to the various elements of the target system, and one or more goals to be achieved during control of the target system—the Decision Module Construction component then performs various automated actions to generate, test and deploy one or more executable decision modules to use in performing the control of the target system.
  • the Decision Module Construction component may thus operate as part of a configuration or setup phase that occurs before a later run-time phase in which the generated decision modules are executed to perform control of the target system, although in some embodiments and situations the Decision Module Construction component may be further used after an initial deployment to improve or extend or otherwise modify an automated control system that has one or more decision modules (e.g., while the automated control system continues to be used to control the target system), such as to add, remove or modify decision modules for the automated control system.
  • some or all automated control systems that are generated and deployed may further provide various components within them for execution during the runtime operation of the automated control system, such as by including such components within decision modules in some embodiments and situations.
  • Such components may include, for example, a Control Action Determination component of each decision module (or of some decision modules) to optimize or otherwise determine and improve the control actions that the decision module generates.
  • such a Control Action Determination component in a decision module may in some embodiments attempt to automatically determine the decision module's control actions for a particular time to reflect a near-optimal solution with respect to or one more goals and in light of a model of the decision module for the target system that has multiple inter-related constraints—if so, such a near-optimal solution may be based at least in part on a partially optimized solution that is within a threshold amount of a fully optimized solution.
  • Such determination of one or more control actions to perform may occur for a particular time and for each of one or more decision modules, as well as be repeated over multiple times for ongoing control by at least some decision modules in some situations.
  • the model for a decision module is implemented as a Hamiltonian function that reflects a set of coupled differential equations based in part on constraints representing at least part of the target system, such as to allow the model and its Hamiltonian function implementation to be updated over multiple time periods by adding additional expressions within the evolving Hamiltonian function.
  • the components included within a generated and deployed automated control system for execution during the automated control system's runtime operation may further include one or more Coordinated Control Management components to coordinate the control actions of multiple decision modules that are collectively performing the control of a target system for the automated control system.
  • some or all decision modules may each include such a Control Action Determination component in some embodiments to attempt to synchronize that decision module's local solutions and proposed control actions with those of one or more other decision modules in the automated control system, such as by determining a consensus shared model with those other decision modules that simultaneously provides solutions from the decision module's local model and the models of the one or more other decision modules.
  • each decision module's model is implemented in some embodiments as a Hamiltonian function that reflects a set of coupled differential equations based in part on constraints representing at least part of the target system, such as to allow each decision module's model and its Hamiltonian function implementation to be combined with the models of one or more other decision modules by adding additional expressions for those other decision modules' models within the initial Hamiltonian function for the local model of the decision module.
  • FIG. 1 is a network diagram illustrating an example environment in which a system for performing cooperative distributed control of one or more target systems may be configured and initiated.
  • a CDD system 140 is executing on one or more computing systems 190 , including in the illustrated embodiment to operate in an online manner and provide a graphical user interface (GUI) (not shown) and/or other interfaces 119 to enable one or more remote users of client computing systems 110 to interact over one or more intervening computer networks 100 with the CDD system 140 to configure and create one or more decision modules to include as part of an automated control system to use with each of one or more target systems to be controlled.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • target system 1 160 and target system 2 170 are example target systems illustrated in this example, although it will be appreciated that only one target system or numerous target systems may be available in particular embodiments and situations, and that each such target system may include a variety of mechanical, electronic, chemical, biological, and/or other types of components to implement operations of the target system in a manner specific to the target system.
  • the one or more users may interact with the CDD system 140 to generate an example automated control system 122 for target system 1 , with the automated control system including multiple decision modules 124 in this example that will cooperatively interact to control portions of the target system 1 160 when later deployed and implemented.
  • the process of the users interacting with the CDD system 140 to create the automated control system 122 may involve a variety of interactions over time, including in some cases independent actions of different groups of users, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere.
  • it may perform one or more interactions with the target system 1 as illustrated, such as to obtain partial initial state information, although some or all training activities may in at least some embodiments include simulating effects of control actions in the target system 1 without actually implementing those control actions at that time.
  • the automated control system 122 may be deployed and implemented to begin performing operations involving controlling the target system 1 160 , such as by optionally executing the automated control system 122 on the one or more computing systems 190 of the CDD system 140 , so as to interact over the computer networks 100 with the target system 1 .
  • the automated control system 122 may instead be deployed by executing local copies of some or all of the automated control system 122 (e.g., one or more of the multiple decision modules 124 ) in a manner local to the target system 1 , as illustrated with respect to a deployed copy 121 of some or all of automated control system 1 , such as on one or more computing systems (not shown) that are part of the target system 1 .
  • one or more users may similarly interact over the computer network 100 with the CDD system 140 to create a separate automated control system 126 for use in controlling some or all of the target system 2 170 .
  • the automated control system 126 for target system 2 includes only a single decision module 128 that will perform all of the control actions for the automated control system 126 .
  • the automated control system 126 may similarly be deployed and implemented for target system 2 in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to automated control system 122 , such as to execute locally on the one or more computing systems 190 and/or on one or more computing systems (not shown) that are part of the target system 2 , although a deployed copy of automated control system 2 is not illustrated in this example. It will be further appreciated that the automated control systems 122 and/or 126 may further include other components and/or functionality that are separate from the particular decision modules 124 and 128 , respectively, although such other components and/or functionality are not illustrated in FIG. 1 .
  • the network 100 may, for example, be a publicly accessible network of linked networks, possibly operated by various distinct parties, such as the Internet, with the CDD system 140 available to any users or only certain users over the network 100 .
  • the network 100 may be a private network, such as, for example, a corporate or university network that is wholly or partially inaccessible to non-privileged users.
  • the network 100 may include one or more private networks with access to and/or from the Internet.
  • CDD system 140 in the illustrated embodiment is implemented in an online manner to support various users over the one or more computer networks 100
  • a copy of the CDD system 140 may instead be implemented in other manners, such as to support a single user or a group of related users (e.g., a company or other organization), such as if the one or more computer networks 100 are instead an internal computer network of the company or other organization, and with such a copy of the CDD system optionally not being available to other users external to the company or other organizations.
  • the online version of the CDD system 140 and/or local copy version of the CDD system 140 may in some embodiments and situations operate in a fee-based manner, such that the one or more users provide various fees to use various operations of the CDD system, such as to perform interactions to generate decision modules and corresponding automated control systems, and/or to deploy or implement such decision modules and corresponding automated control systems in various manners.
  • each of its components may include software instructions that execute on one or more computing systems (not shown) by one or more processors (not shown), such as to configure those processors and computing systems to operate as specialized machines with respect to performing their programmed functionality.
  • FIG. 2 is a network diagram illustrating an example environment in which a system for performing cooperative distributed control of target systems may be implemented, and in particular continues the examples discussed with respect to FIG. 1 .
  • target system 1 160 is again illustrated, with the automated control system 122 now being deployed and implemented to use in actively controlling the target system 1 160 .
  • the decision modules 124 are represented as individual decision modules 124 a , 124 b , etc., to 124 n , and may be executing locally to the target system 1 160 and/or in a remote manner over one or more intervening computer networks (not shown).
  • each of the decision modules 124 includes a local copy of a CDD Control Action Determination component 144 , such as with component 144 a supporting its local decision module 124 a , component 144 b supporting its local decision module 124 b , and component 144 n supporting its local decision module 124 n .
  • each of the decision modules 124 including a copy of a CDD Coordinated Control Management component 146 to perform such synchronization, with component 146 a supporting its local decision module 124 a , component 146 b supporting its local decision module 124 b , and component 146 n supporting its local decision module 124 n.
  • various interactions 175 between the decision modules 124 are performed, such as to share information about current models and other state of the decision modules to enable cooperation and coordination between various decision modules, such as for a particular decision module to operate in a partially synchronized consensus manner with respect to one or more other decision modules (and in some situations in a fully synchronized manner in which the consensus actions of all of the decision modules 124 converge).
  • various state information 143 may be obtained by the automated control system 122 from the target system 160 , such as initial state information and changing state information over time, and including outputs or other results in the target system 1 from control actions performed by the decision modules 124 .
  • the target system 1 in this example includes various control elements 161 that the automated control system 122 may manipulate, and in this example each decision module 124 may have a separate group of one or more control elements 161 that it manipulates (such that decision module A 124 a performs interactions 169 a to perform control actions A 147 a on control elements A 161 a , decision module B 124 b performs interactions 169 b to perform control actions B 147 b on control elements B 161 b , and decision module N 124 n performs interactions 169 n to perform control actions N 147 n on control elements N 161 n ).
  • Such control actions affect the internal state 163 of other elements of the target system 1 , including optionally to cause or influence one or more outputs 162 .
  • At least some of the internal state information 163 is provided to some or all of the decision modules to influence their ongoing control actions, with each of the decision modules 124 a - 124 n possibly having a distinct set of state information 143 a - 143 n , respectively, in this example.
  • each decision module 124 may use such state information 143 and a local model 145 of the decision module for the target system to determine particular control actions 147 to next perform, such as for each of multiple time periods, although in other embodiments and situations, a particular automated control system may perform interactions with a particular target system for only one time period or only for some time periods.
  • the local CDD Control Action Determination component 144 for a decision module 124 may determine a near-optimal location solution for that decision module's local model 145 , and with the local CDD Coordinated Control Management component 146 determining a synchronized consensus solution to reflect other of the decision modules 124 , including to update the decision module's local model 145 based on such local and/or synchronized solutions that are determined.
  • the automated control system performs various interactions with the target system 160 , including to request state information, and to provide instructions to modify values of or otherwise manipulate control elements 161 of the target system 160 .
  • decision module 124 a may perform one or more interactions 169 a with one or more control elements 161 a of the target system, while decision module 124 b may similarly perform one or more interactions 169 b with one or more separate control elements B 161 b , and decision module 124 n may perform one or more interactions 169 n with one or more control elements N 161 n of the target system 160 .
  • at least some control elements may not perform control actions during each time period.
  • decision module 128 of automated control system 126 includes only the single executing decision module 128 in this example, although in other embodiments the automated control system 126 may include other components and functionality.
  • the decision module 128 since only a single decision module 128 is implemented for the automated control system 126 , the decision module 128 includes a local CDD Control Action Determination component 244 , but does not in the illustrated embodiment include any local CDD Coordinated Control Management component, since there are not other decision modules with which to synchronize and interact.
  • the distributed nature of operations of automated control systems such as those of 122 allow partially decoupled operations of the various decision modules, include to allow modifications to the group of decision modules 124 to be modified over time while the automated control system 122 is in use, such as to add new decision modules 124 and/or to remove existing decision modules 124 .
  • changes may be made to particular decision modules 124 and/or 128 , such as to change rules or other restrictions specific to a particular decision module and/or to change goals specific to a particular decision module over time, with a new corresponding model being generated and deployed within such a decision module, including in some embodiments and situations while the corresponding automated control system continues control operations of a corresponding target system.
  • each automated control system is described as controlling a single target system in the examples of FIGS. 1 and 2 , in other embodiments and situations, other configurations may be used, such as for a single automated control system to control multiple target systems (e.g., multiple inter-related target systems, multiple target systems of the same type, etc.), and/or multiple automated control systems may operate to control a single target system, such as by each operating independently to control different portions of that target control system. It will be appreciated that other configurations may similarly be used in other embodiments and situations.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating example computing systems suitable for performing techniques for implementing automated control systems to control or otherwise manipulate at least some operations of specified physical systems or other target systems in configured manners.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a server computing system 300 suitable for providing at least some functionality of a CDD system, although in other embodiments multiple computing systems may be used for the execution (e.g., to have distinct computing systems executing the CDD Decision Module Construction component for initial configuration and setup before run-time control occurs, and one or more copies of the CDD Control Action Determination component 344 and/or the CDD Coordinated Control Managements component 346 for the actual run-time control).
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating example computing systems suitable for performing techniques for implementing automated control systems to control or otherwise manipulate at least some operations of specified physical systems or other target systems in configured manners.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a server computing system 300 suitable for providing at least some functionality of a CDD system, although in other embodiments multiple computing systems may be used for the execution (e.g., to have
  • FIG. 3 also illustrates various client computer systems 350 that may be used by customers or other users of the CDD system 340 , as well as one or more target systems (in this example, target system 1 360 and target system 2 370 , which are accessible to the CDD system 340 over one or more computer networks 390 ).
  • target system 1 360 and target system 2 370 which are accessible to the CDD system 340 over one or more computer networks 390 .
  • the server computing system 300 has components in the illustrated embodiment that include one or more hardware CPU (“central processing unit”) computer processors 305 , various I/O (“input/output”) hardware components 310 , storage 320 , and memory 330 .
  • the illustrated I/O components include a display 311 , a network connection 312 , a computer-readable media drive 313 , and other I/O devices 315 (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, speakers, etc.).
  • the illustrated client computer systems 350 may each have components similar to those of server computing system 300 , including one or more CPUs 351 , I/O components 352 , storage 354 , and memory 357 , although some details are not illustrated for the computing systems 350 for the sake of brevity.
  • the target systems 360 and 370 may also each include one or more computing systems (not shown) having components that are similar to some or all of the components illustrated with respect to server computing system 300 , but such computing systems and components are not illustrated in this example for the sake of brev
  • the CDD system 340 is executing in memory 330 and includes components 342 - 346 , and in some embodiments the system and/or components each includes various software instructions that when executed program one or more of the CPU processors 305 to provide an embodiment of a CDD system as described elsewhere herein.
  • the CDD system 340 may interact with computing systems 350 over the network 390 (e.g., via the Internet and/or the World Wide Web, via a private cellular network, etc.), as well as the target systems 360 and 370 in this example.
  • the CDD system includes functionality related to generating and deploying decision modules in configured manners for customers or other users, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere herein.
  • the other computing systems 350 may also be executing various software as part of interactions with the CDD system 340 and/or its components.
  • client computing systems 350 may be executing software in memory 357 to interact with CDD system 340 (e.g., as part of a Web browser, a specialized client-side application program, etc.), such as to interact with one or more interfaces (not shown) of the CDD system 340 to configure and deploy automated control systems (e.g., stored automated control systems 325 that were previously created by the CDD system 340 ) or other decision modules 329 , as well as to perform various other types of actions, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere.
  • automated control systems e.g., stored automated control systems 325 that were previously created by the CDD system 340
  • other decision modules 329 e.g., stored automated control systems 325 that were previously created by the CDD system 340
  • Various information related to the functionality of the CDD system 340 may be stored in storage 320 , such as information 321 related to users of the CDD system (e.g., account information), and information 323 related to one or more target systems.
  • information 321 related to users of the CDD system e.g., account information
  • information 323 related to one or more target systems e.g., information 321 related to users of the CDD system (e.g., account information), and information 323 related to one or more target systems.
  • computing systems 300 and 350 and target systems 360 and 370 are merely illustrative and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention.
  • the computing systems may instead each include multiple interacting computing systems or devices, and the computing systems/nodes may be connected to other devices that are not illustrated, including through one or more networks such as the Internet, via the Web, or via private networks (e.g., mobile communication networks, etc.).
  • a computing node or other computing system or device may comprise any combination of hardware that may interact and perform the described types of functionality, including without limitation desktop or other computers, database servers, network storage devices and other network devices, PDAs, cell phones, wireless phones, pagers, electronic organizers, Internet appliances, television-based systems (e.g., using set-top boxes and/or personal/digital video recorders), and various other consumer products that include appropriate communication capabilities.
  • the functionality provided by the illustrated CDD system 340 and its components may in some embodiments be distributed in additional components.
  • some of the functionality of the CDD system 340 and/or CDD components 342 - 346 may not be provided and/or other additional functionality may be available.
  • some or all of the systems and/or components may be implemented or provided in other manners, such as by using means that are implemented at least partially or completely in firmware and/or hardware, including, but not limited to, one or more application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), standard integrated circuits, controllers (e.g., by executing appropriate instructions, and including microcontrollers and/or embedded controllers), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs), etc.
  • ASICs application-specific integrated circuits
  • controllers e.g., by executing appropriate instructions, and including microcontrollers and/or embedded controllers
  • FPGAs field-programmable gate arrays
  • CPLDs complex programmable logic devices
  • Non-transitory computer-readable storage medium such as a hard disk or flash drive or other non-volatile storage device, volatile or non-volatile memory (e.g., RAM), a network storage device, or a portable media article to be read by an appropriate drive (e.g., a DVD disk, a CD disk, an optical disk, etc.) or via an appropriate connection.
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium such as a hard disk or flash drive or other non-volatile storage device, volatile or non-volatile memory (e.g., RAM), a network storage device, or a portable media article to be read by an appropriate drive (e.g., a DVD disk, a CD disk, an optical disk, etc.) or via an appropriate connection.
  • the systems, components and data structures may also in some embodiments be transmitted as generated data signals (e.g., as part of a carrier wave or other analog or digital propagated signal) on a variety of computer-readable transmission mediums, including wireless-based and wired/cable-based mediums, and may take a variety of forms (e.g., as part of a single or multiplexed analog signal, or as multiple discrete digital packets or frames).
  • Such computer program products may also take other forms in other embodiments. Accordingly, the present invention may be practiced with other computer system configurations.
  • FIG. 4 is a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a Collaborative Distributed Decision (CDD) system routine 400 .
  • the routine may, for example, be provided by execution of the CDD system 340 of FIG. 3 and/or the CDD system 140 of FIG. 1 , such as to provide functionality to construct and implement automated control systems for specified target systems.
  • CDD Collaborative Distributed Decision
  • the illustrated embodiment of the routine begins at block 410 , where information or instructions are received. If it is determined in block 420 that the information or instructions of block 410 include an indication to create or revise one or more decision modules for use as part of an automated control system for a particular target system, the routine continues to block 425 to initiate execution of a Decision Module Construction component, and in block 430 obtains and stores one or more resulting decision modules for the target system that are created in block 425 .
  • a routine for such a Decision Module Construction component is discussed in greater detail with respect to FIGS. 5A-5B .
  • the routine continues to block 440 to determine whether the information or instructions received in block 410 indicate to deploy one or more created decision modules to control a specified target system, such as for one or more decision modules that are part of an automated control system for that target system.
  • the one or more decision modules to deploy may have been created immediately prior with respect to block 425 , such that the deployment occurs in a manner that is substantially simultaneous with the creation, or in other situations may include one or more decision modules that were created at a previous time and stored for later use.
  • routine continues to block 450 to initiate the execution of those one or more decision modules for that target system, such as on one or more computing systems local to an environment of the target system, or instead on one or more remote computing systems that communicate with the target system over one or more intermediary computer networks (e.g., one or more computing systems under control of a provider of the CDD system).
  • intermediary computer networks e.g., one or more computing systems under control of a provider of the CDD system.
  • routine continues to block 460 to determine whether to perform distributed management of multiple decision modules being deployed in a manner external to those decision modules, such as via one or more centralized Coordinated Control Management components. If so, the routine continues to block 465 to initiate execution of one or more such centralized CDD Coordinated Control Management components for use with those decision modules.
  • routine continues to block 470 to optionally obtain and store information about the operations of the one or more decision modules and/or resulting activities that occur in the target system, such as for later analysis and/or reporting.
  • routine continues instead to block 485 to perform one or more other indicated operations if appropriate.
  • other authorized operations may include obtaining results information about the operation of a target system in other manners (e.g., by monitoring outputs or other state information for the target system), analyzing results of operations of decision modules and/or activities of corresponding target systems, generating reports or otherwise providing information to users regarding such operations and/or activities, etc.
  • the analysis of activities of a particular target system over time may allow patterns to be identified in operation of the target system, such as to allow a model of that target system to be modified accordingly (whether manually or in an automated learning manner) to reflect those patterns and to respond based on them.
  • distributed operation of multiple decision modules for an automated control system in a partially decoupled manner allows various changes to be made while the automated control system is in operation, such as to add one or more new decision modules, to remove one or more existing decision modules, to modify the operation of a particular decision module (e.g., by changing rules or other information describing the target system that is part of a model for the decision module), etc.
  • the partially decoupled nature of multiple such decision modules in an automated control system allows one or more such decision modules to operate individually at times, such as if network communication issues or other problems prevent communication between multiple decision modules that would otherwise allow their individualized control actions to be coordinated—in such situations, some or all such decision modules may continue to operate in an individualized manner, such as to provide useful ongoing control operations for a target system even if optimal or near-optimal solutions cannot be identified from coordination and synchronization between a group of multiple decision modules that collectively provide the automated control system for the target system.
  • routine continues to block 495 to determine whether to continue, such as until an explicit indication to terminate is received. If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 410 , and otherwise continues to block 499 and ends.
  • FIGS. 5A-5B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Decision Module Construction routine 500 .
  • the routine may, for example, be provided by execution of the component 342 of FIG. 3 and/or the component 142 of FIG. 1 , such as to provide functionality to allow users to provide information describing a target system of interest, and to perform corresponding automated operations to construct one or more decision modules to use to control the target system in specified manners. While the illustrated embodiment of the routine interacts with users in particular manners, such as via a displayed GUI (graphical user interface), it will be appreciated that other embodiments of the routine may interact with users in other manners, such as via a defined API (application programming interface) that an executing program invokes on behalf of a user.
  • a defined API application programming interface
  • routine may further be implemented as part of an integrated development environment or other software tool that is available for one or more users to use, such as by implementing an online interface that is available to a variety of remote users over a public network such as the Internet, while in other embodiments a copy of the CDD system and/or particular CDD components may be used to support a single organization or other group of one or more users, such as by being executed on computing systems under the control of the organization or group.
  • CDD Decision Module Construction component may in some embodiments and situations be separated into multiple sub-components, such as a rules editor component that users interact with to specify rules and other description information for a target system, and a rules compiler engine that processes the user-specified rules and other information to create one or more corresponding decision modules.
  • a rules editor component that users interact with to specify rules and other description information for a target system
  • a rules compiler engine that processes the user-specified rules and other information to create one or more corresponding decision modules.
  • the illustrated embodiment of the routine 500 begins at block 510 , where the routine provides or updates a displayed user interface to one or more users, such as via a request received at an online version of component that is implementing the routine, or instead based on the routine being executed by one or more such users on computing systems that they control. While various operations are shown in the illustrated embodiment of the routine as occurring in a serial manner for the purpose of illustration, it will be appreciated that user interactions with such a user interface may occur in an iterative manner and/or over multiple periods of time and/or user sessions, including to update a user interface previously displayed to a user in various manners (e.g., to reflect a user action, to reflect user feedback generated by operation of the routine or from another component, etc.), as discussed further below.
  • routine continues to block 520 to receive information from one or more such users describing a target system to be controlled, including information about a plurality of elements of the target system that include one or more manipulatable control elements and optionally one or more outputs that the control elements affect, information about rules that specify restrictions involving the elements, information about state information that will be available during controlling of the system (e.g., values of particular elements or other state variables), and one or more goals to achieve during the controlling of the target system.
  • information about a plurality of elements of the target system that include one or more manipulatable control elements and optionally one or more outputs that the control elements affect, information about rules that specify restrictions involving the elements, information about state information that will be available during controlling of the system (e.g., values of particular elements or other state variables), and one or more goals to achieve during the controlling of the target system.
  • Such information may be obtained over a period of time from one or more users, including in some embodiments for a first group of one or more users to supply some information related to a target system and for one or more other second groups of users to independently provide other information about the target system, such as to reflect different areas of expertise of the different users and/or different parts of the target system.
  • the routine continues to block 525 to identify any errors that have been received in the user input, and to prompt the user(s) to correct those errors, such as by updating the display in a corresponding manner as discussed with respect to block 510 . While the identification of such errors is illustrated as occurring after the receiving of the information in block 520 , it will be appreciated that some or all such errors may instead be identified as the users are inputting information into the user interface, such as to identify syntax errors in rules or other information that the users specify.
  • the illustrated embodiment of the routine continues to block 530 to optionally decompose the information about the target system into multiple subsets that each correspond to a portion of the target system, such as with each subset having one or more different control elements that are manipulatable by the automated control system being created by the routine, and optionally have overlapping or completely distinct goals and/or sets of rules and other information describing the respective portions of the target system.
  • such decomposition if performed, may in some situations be performed manually by the users indicating different subgroups of information that they enter, and/or in an automated manner by the routine based on an analysis of the information that has been specified (e.g., based on the size of rules and other descriptive information supplied for a target system, based on inter-relationships between different rules or goals or other information, etc.). In other embodiments, no such decomposition may be performed.
  • the routine continues to block 535 to, for each subset of target system description information (or for all the received information if no such subsets are identified), convert that subset (or all the information) into a set of constraints that encapsulate the restrictions, goals, and other specified information for that subset (or for all the information).
  • the routine then identifies any errors that occur from the converting process, and if any are identified, may prompt the user to correct those errors, such as in a manner similar to that described with respect to blocks 525 and 510 .
  • the routine may in some situations in blocks 525 and/or 540 return to block 510 when such errors are identified, to display corresponding feedback to the user(s) and to allow the user(s) to make corrections and re-perform following operations such as those of blocks 520 - 540 .
  • the errors identified in the converting process in block 540 may include, for example, errors related to inconsistent restrictions, such as if the restrictions as a group are impossible to satisfy.
  • the routine continues to block 545 to, for each set of constraints (or a single constraint set if no subsets were identified in block 530 ), apply one or more validation rules to the set of constraints to test overall effectiveness of the corresponding information that the constraints represent, and to prompt the one or more users to correct any errors that are identified in a manner similar to that with respect to blocks 525 , 540 and 510 .
  • Such validation rules may test one or more of controllability, observability, stability, and goal completeness, as well as any user-added validation rules, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere.
  • the routine then converts each validated set of constraints to a set of coupled differential equations that model at least a portion of the target system to which the underlying information corresponds.
  • the routine continues to block 553 to perform activities related to training a model for each set of coupled differential equations, including to determine one or more of a size of a training time window to use, size of multiple training time slices within the time window, and/or a type of training time slice within the time window.
  • the determination of one or more such sizes or types of information is performed by using default or pre-specified information, while in other embodiments and situations the users may specify such information, or an automated determination of such information may be performed in one or more manners (e.g., by testing different sizes and evaluating results to find sizes with the best performance).
  • time slices may include, for example, successions of time slices that overlap or do not overlap, such that the training for a second time slice may be dependent only on results of a first time slice (if they do not overlap) or instead may be based at least in part on updating information already determined for at least some of the first time slice (if they do overlap in part or in whole).
  • routine continues to block 555 to, for each set of coupled differential equations representing a model, train the model for that set of coupled differential equations using partial initial state information for the target system, including to estimate values of variable that are not known and/or directly observable for the target system by simulating effects of performing control actions over the time window, such as for successive time slices throughout the time window, and to test the simulated performance of the trained model. Additional details related to training and testing are included elsewhere herein.
  • the routine continues to block 560 to determine whether the training and testing was successful, and if not returns to block 510 to display corresponding feedback information to the users to allow them to correct errors that caused the lack of success. If it is instead determined in block 560 that the testing and training were successful, however, the routine continues instead to block 570 to generate an executable decision module for each trained and tested model that includes that model, as well as a local CCD Control Action Determination component that the decision module will use when executed to determine optimal or near-optimal control actions to perform for the target system based on the information included in the model, and in light of the one or more goals for that decision module.
  • the generated executable decision module may in some embodiments and situations further include a local CCD Coordinated Control Management component to coordinate control actions of multiple decision modules that collectively will provide an automated control system for the target system, such as by synchronizing respective models of the various decision modules over time.
  • the routine continues to block 580 to provide the generated executable decision modules for use, including to optionally store them for later execution and/or deployment.
  • routine continues to block 595 to determine whether to continue, such as until an explicit indication to terminate is received. If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 510 , and otherwise continues to block 599 and ends.
  • FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a routine 600 corresponding to a generic representation of a decision module that is being executed.
  • the routine may, for example, be provided by execution of a decision module 329 or as part of an automated control system 325 of FIG. 3 and/or a decision module 124 or 128 of FIG. 1 or 2 , such as to provide functionality for controlling at least a portion of a target system in a manner specific to information and a model encoded for the decision module, including to reflect one or more goals to be achieved by the decision module during its controlling activities.
  • multiple decision modules may collectively and cooperatively act to control a particular target system, such as with each decision module controlling one or more distinct control elements for the target system or otherwise representing or interacting with a portion of the target system, while in other embodiments and situations a single decision module may act alone to control a target system.
  • the routine 600 further reflects actions performed by a particular example decision module when it is deployed in controlling a portion of a target system, although execution of at least portions of a decision module may occur at other times, such as initially to train a model for the decision module before the decision module is deployed, as discussed in greater detail with respect to the CDD Decision Module Construction routine 500 of FIGS. 5A-5B .
  • the illustrated embodiment of the routine 600 begins at block 610 , where an initial model for the decision module is determined that describes at least a portion of a target system to be controlled, one or more goals for the decision module to attempt to achieve related to control of the target system, and optionally initial state information for the target system.
  • the routine continues to block 615 to perform one or more actions to train the initial model if needed, as discussed in greater detail with respect to blocks 553 and 555 of FIGS. 5 A- 5 B—in some embodiments and situations, such training for block 615 is performed only if initial training is not done by the routine 500 of FIGS.
  • the training of block 615 is performed to capture information about a current state of the target system at a time that the decision module begins to execute (e.g., if not immediately deployed after initial creation and training) and/or to re-train the model at times as discussed in greater detail with respect to routine 700 of FIGS. 7A-7B as initiated by block 630 .
  • routine continues to block 617 to determine a time period to use for performing each control action decision for the decision module, such as to reflect a rate at which control element modifications in the target system are needed and/or to reflect a rate at which new incoming state information is received that may alter future manipulations of the control elements.
  • the routine then continues to block 620 to start the next time period, beginning with a first time period moving forward from the startup of the execution of the decision module. Blocks 620 - 680 are then performed in a loop for each such time period going forward until execution of the decision module is suspended or terminated, although in other embodiments a particular decision module may execute for only a single time period each time that it is executed.
  • the routine optionally obtains state information for the time period, such as current state information that has been received for the target system or one or more related external sources since the last time period began, and/or by actively retrieving current values of one or more elements of the target system or corresponding variables as needed.
  • the routine then initiates execution of a local CCD Control Action Determination component of the decision module, with one example of such a routine discussed in greater detail with respect to routine 700 of FIGS. 7A-7B .
  • the results of the execution of the component in block 630 are received, including to either obtain an updated model for the decision module with a local solution for the current time period and decision module that includes one or more proposed control action determinations that the decision module may perform for the current time period, or to receive an indication that no local solution was found for the decision module in the allowed time for the execution of the component in block 630 .
  • a previous model e.g., that does not reflect recent changes in state information and/or recent changes in activities of other decision modules, if any
  • routine continues to block 644 to determine if other decision modules are collectively controlling portions of the current target system, such as part of the same automated control system as the local decision module, and if so continues to block 645 . Otherwise, the routine selects the local proposed control actions of the decision module as a final determined control action to perform, and continues to block 675 to implement those control actions for the current time period.
  • the routine in block 645 determines if the local decision module includes a local copy of a CDD Coordinated Control Management (CCM) component for use in synchronizing the proposed control action determinations for the decision module's local solutions with activities of other decision modules that are collectively controlling the same target system. If so, the routine continues to block 647 to provide the one or more proposed control action determinations of the decision module and the corresponding current local model for the decision module to the local CDD CCM component, and otherwise continues to block 649 to provide the one or more proposed control action determinations for the decision module and the corresponding local model of the decision module to one or more centralized CDD CCM components.
  • CCM CDD Coordinated Control Management
  • the routine continues to block 655 to obtain results of the actions of the CDD CCM component(s) in blocks 647 or 649 , including to either obtain a further updated model resulting from synchronization of the local model for the current decision module with information from one or more other decision modules, such that the further updated model indicates one or more final control action determinations to perform for the time period for the current decision module, or an indication that no such synchronization was completed in the allowed time.
  • the routine continues to block 660 to determine whether the synchronization was completed, and if so continues to block 665 to store the further updated model from the synchronization, and otherwise continues to block 670 to use the prior proposed control action determinations locally to the decision module as the final control action determinations for the time period.
  • the routine continues to block 675 to implement the one or more final determined control actions for the decision module in the target system, such as by interacting with one or more effectuators in the target system that modify values or otherwise manipulate one or more control elements of the target system, or by otherwise providing input to the target system to cause such modifications or other manipulations to occur.
  • the routine optionally obtains information about the results in the target system of the control actions performed, and stores and/or provides information to the CDD system about such obtained results and/or about the activities of the decision module for the current time period.
  • the routine continues to block 695 to determine whether to continue, such as until an indication to terminate or suspend is received (e.g., to reflect an end to current operation of the target system or an end of use of the decision module to control at least a portion of the target system). If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 620 to start the next time period, and otherwise continues to block 699 and ends.
  • an indication to terminate or suspend e.g., to reflect an end to current operation of the target system or an end of use of the decision module to control at least a portion of the target system.
  • FIGS. 7A-7B are a flow diagram of a example embodiment of a CDD Control Action Determination routine 700 .
  • the routine may, for example, be provided by execution of the component 344 of FIG. 3 and/or components 144 a - n or 244 of FIG. 2 , such as to determine control actions for a decision module to propose and/or implement for a target system during a particular time period, including in some embodiments to perform an optimization to determine near-optimal actions (e.g., within a threshold of an optimal solution) to perform with respect to one or more goals if possible.
  • near-optimal actions e.g., within a threshold of an optimal solution
  • routine is performed in a manner local to a particular decision module, such that some or all decision modules may each implement a local version of such a routine
  • routine may be implemented in a centralized manner by one or more components with which one or more decision modules interact over one or more networks, such as with a particular decision module indicated to be used at a particular time rather than acting on behalf of the local decision module.
  • the illustrated embodiment of the routine 700 begins at block 703 , where information or a request is received.
  • the routine continues to block 705 to determine a type of the information or request, and to proceed accordingly.
  • a request is received in block 703 to attempt to determine a solution for a current time period given a current model of the local decision module
  • the routine continues to block 710 to begin to perform such activities, as discussed in greater detail with respect to block 710 - 790 . If it is instead determined in block 705 that a request to relax one or more rules or other restrictions for the current model of the local decision module is received, such as discussed in greater detail with respect to blocks 760 and 765 , the routine continues to block 765 .
  • routine continues to block 780 to obtain user input to use during the rule repair process (e.g., to interact with a CDD Decision Module Construction component, or to instead interact with one or more users in another manner), such as to allow the current model for the local decision module to later be updated and replaced based on further resulting user actions, or if operation of the target system can be suspended, to optionally wait to further perform the routine 700 until such an updated model is received.
  • user input e.g., to interact with a CDD Decision Module Construction component, or to instead interact with one or more users in another manner
  • the routine continues to block 780 to obtain user input to use during the rule repair process (e.g., to interact with a CDD Decision Module Construction component, or to instead interact with one or more users in another manner), such as to allow the current model for the local decision module to later be updated and replaced based on further resulting user actions, or if operation of the target system can be suspended, to optionally wait to further perform the routine 700 until such an updated model is received.
  • routine continues instead to block 708 to perform one or more other indicated operations as appropriate, and to then proceed to block 799 .
  • Such other indicated operations may include, for example, receiving information about current models and/or control actions proposed or performed by one or more other decision modules that are collectively controlling a target system with the local decision module (such as for use in synchronizing the model of the local decision module with such other decision modules by generating a consensus or converged shared model, as discussed in greater detail with respect to routine 800 of FIGS.
  • the routine continues to block 710 to receive a current set of coupled differential equations that represent the current model for the local decision module of at least a portion of the target system, optionally along with additional state information for the target system for the current time.
  • the routine then continues to block 715 to determine whether to train or re-train the model, such as if the routine is called for a first time upon initial execution of a corresponding decision module or if error measurements from ongoing operations indicate a need for re-training, as discussed in greater detail with respect to blocks 755 , 770 and 730 .
  • routine continues to block 720 to determine one or more of the size of a training time window, size of training time slices within the time window, and/or type of training time slices within the training time window, such as in a manner similar to that previously discussed with respect to block 553 of routine 500 of FIGS. 5A-5B .
  • routine continues to block 725 to use partial initial state information for the target system to train the model, including to estimate values of state variables for the target system that are not known and/or directly observable, by simulating effects of performing control actions over the time window for each of the time slices, as discussed in greater detail with respect to block 555 of routine 500 of FIGS. 5A-5B .
  • the routine continues to block 730 to perform a piecewise linear analysis to attempt to determine a solution for the current model and any additional state information that was obtained in block 710 , with the solution (if determined) including one or more proposed control action determinations for the local decision module to take for a current time period, as well as in some embodiments to use one or more model error gauges to make one or more error measurements with respect to the current model, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere.
  • the routine then continues to block 735 to determine if the operations in block 730 determined a solution within a amount of time allowed for the operation of block 730 (e.g., a defined subset or fraction of the current time period), and if so continues to block 740 to update the current set of coupled differential equations and the resulting current model for the local decision module to reflect the solution, with the resulting updated information provided as an output of the routine 700 .
  • a solution within a amount of time allowed for the operation of block 730 (e.g., a defined subset or fraction of the current time period)
  • routine continues to block 745 to determine if additional time is available within the current time period for further attempts to determine a solution, and if not continues to block 790 to provide output of the routine 700 indicating that no solution was determined for the current time period.
  • routine continues to perform blocks 755 - 780 to perform one or more further attempts to identify the solution—it will be appreciated that one or more of the operations of blocks 755 - 780 may be repeatedly performed multiple times for a given time period if sufficient time is available to continue further solution determination attempts.
  • routine continues to block 755 if additional time is determined to be available in block 745 , where it determines whether the measurements from one or more gauges indicate model error measurements that are over one or more thresholds indicating modifications to the model are needed, such as based on the model error measurements from the gauges discussed with respect to block 730 .
  • routine continues to block 760 to determine whether there are one or more rules or other restrictions in the current model that are available to be relaxed for the current time period (that have not previously attempted to be relaxed during the time period, if this is not the first pass through this portion of the routing for the current time period), and if so continues to block 765 to relax one or more such rules or other restrictions and to return to block 730 to re-attempt the piecewise linear analysis with the revised model based on those relaxed rules or other restrictions.
  • the routine continues instead to block 770 to determine whether to re-train the model based on one or more of the gauges indicating sufficient errors to do so, such as based on accumulated errors over one or more time periods of updates to the model. If so, the routine returns to block 720 to perform such re-training in blocks 720 and 725 , and then continues to block 730 to re-attempt the piecewise linear analysis with the resulting re-trained model.
  • the routine continues to block 775 to determine whether the model error measurements from one or more of the gauges indicate a subset of one or more rules or other restrictions in the model that potentially have errors that need to be repaired. If so, the routine continues to block 780 to provide information to one or more users via the CDD Decision Module Construction component, to allow the users to revise the rules or other restrictions as appropriate, although in other embodiments some or all such rule repair activities may instead be attempted or performed in an automated manner.
  • routine 700 After block 780 , or if it is instead determined in block 775 not to repair any rules, the routine continues to block 790 to provide an indication that no solution was determined for the current time period. After blocks 740 , 708 , or 790 , the routine continues to block 799 and ends. It will be appreciated that if the routine 700 was instead implemented as a centralized routine that supports one or more decision modules remote from the executing component for the routine, the routine 700 may instead return to block 703 to await further information or requests.
  • FIGS. 8A-8B are a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Coordinated Control Management routine 800 .
  • the routine may, for example, be provided by execution of the component 346 of FIG. 3 and/or the components 146 a - n of FIG. 2 , such as to attempt to synchronize current models and their proposed control actions between multiple decision modules that are collectively controlling a target system.
  • the synchronization is performed in a pairwise manner between a particular local decision module's local current model and an intermediate shared model for that decision module that is based on information about the current state of one or more other decision modules, by using a Pareto game technique to determine a Pareto equilibrium if possible that is represented in a consensus shared model, although in other embodiments other types of synchronization methods may be used.
  • routine 800 is performed in a local manner for a particular local decision module, such as by being included within that local decision module, although in other embodiments the routine 800 may be implemented in a centralized manner to support one or more decision modules that are remote from a computing system implementing the component for the routine and that communicate with those decision modules over one or more computer networks, such as with a particular decision module indicated to be used at a particular time rather than acting on behalf of the local decision module.
  • the illustrated embodiment of the routine 800 begins at block 805 , where it waits to receive information or another indication.
  • the routine continues to block 810 to determine if a consensus model or other updated information for another decision module has been received, such as from a copy of the routine 800 executing for that other decision module, and if so continues to block 815 to use the received information to update local intermediate shared model information for use with the local decision module on whose behalf the current copy of the routine 800 is executing, as discussed in greater detail with respect to block 830 .
  • the routine continues to block 820 to determine whether to currently perform a synchronization for the current local model of the local decision module by using information about an intermediate shared model of the local decision module that includes information for one or more other decision modules, such as to do such synchronization each time that an update to the local decision module's model is received (e.g., based on operation of the routine 700 for a copy of the CDD Control Action Determination component local to that decision module) in block 805 and/or each time that information to update the local decision module's intermediate shared model is received in block 805 and used in block 815 , or instead as explicitly indicated in block 805 —if the synchronization is to currently be performed, the routine continues to block 825 and begins to perform blocks 820 - 880 related to such synchronization activities.
  • routine continues to block 885 to perform one or more other indicated operations as appropriate, such as to receive requests from the CDD system or other requestor for current information about operation of the routine 800 and/or to provide corresponding information to one or more entities (e.g., to reflect prior requests), etc.
  • the routine continues to block 825 to obtain a current local model for the local decision module to use in the synchronizing, with the model including one or more proposed control actions to perform for a current time period based on a local solution for the local decision module.
  • the routine then continues to block 830 to retrieve information for an intermediate shared model of the local decision module that represents information for one or more other decision modules (e.g., all other decision modules) that are collectively participating in controlling the target system, with that intermediate shared model similarly representing one or more other proposed control actions resulting from local solutions of those one or more other decision modules, optionally after partial or complete synchronization has been performed for those one or more other decision modules between themselves.
  • an intermediate shared model of the local decision module that represents information for one or more other decision modules (e.g., all other decision modules) that are collectively participating in controlling the target system, with that intermediate shared model similarly representing one or more other proposed control actions resulting from local solutions of those one or more other decision modules, optionally after partial or complete synchronization has been performed for those one or more other decision modules between themselves.
  • the routine then continues to block 835 to attempt to determine a consensus shared model that synchronizes the current model of the local decision module and the intermediate shared model by simultaneously providing solutions to both the local decision module's current model and the intermediate shared model.
  • the operations of block 835 are performed in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to blocks 710 - 730 of routine 700 of FIG. 7A-7B , such as if the local model and the intermediate shared model are combined to create a combination model for whom one or more solutions are to be identified.
  • the local current model and intermediate shared model may each be represented by a Hamiltonian function to enable a straightforward creation of such a combined model in an additive manner for the respective Hamiltonian functions, with the operations of routines 600 and/or 700 of FIGS. 6A-6B and 7 A- 7 B, respectively, similarly representing the models that they update and otherwise manipulate using such Hamiltonian functions.
  • the routine continues to block 840 to determine whether the operations of block 835 succeeded in an allowed amount of time, such as a fraction or other portion of the current time period for which the synchronization is attempted to be performed, and if so the routine continues to block 845 to update both the local model and the intermediate shared model of the local decision module to reflect the consensus shared model.
  • an allowed amount of time such as a fraction or other portion of the current time period for which the synchronization is attempted to be performed
  • the routine continues to block 845 to update both the local model and the intermediate shared model of the local decision module to reflect the consensus shared model.
  • the decision modules of the collective group may eventually converge on a single converged shared model, although in other embodiments and situations there may not be sufficient time for such convergence to occur, or other issues may prevent such convergence.
  • routine continues to block 850 to optionally notify other decision modules of the consensus shared model determined for the local decision module (and/or of a converged shared model, if the operations of 835 were a last step in creating such a converged shared model), such as if each of the notified decision modules is implementing its own local version of the routine 800 and the provided information will be used as part of an intermediate shared model of those other decision modules that includes information from the current local decision module's newly constructed consensus shared model.
  • routine continues to perform blocks 860 - 875 to re-attempt the synchronization with one or more modifications, sometimes repeatedly if sufficient time is available, and in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to blocks 745 - 780 of routine 700 of FIGS. 7A-7B .
  • routine determines in block 860 if additional time is available for one or more such re-attempts at synchronization, and if not the routine continues to block 880 to provide an indication that no synchronization was performed within the allowed time.
  • routine continues to block 870 to take one or more actions to perform one or more of relaxing rules or other restrictions, repairing rules or other restrictions, and/or re-training a model, with respect to one or both of the current model of the local decision module and/or one or more other decision modules whose information is represented in the intermediate shared model of the local decision module.
  • routine continues to block 875 to perform corresponding actions, sometimes one at a time in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to routine 700 , including to cause resulting updates to the current model of the local decision module and/or to the local intermediate shared model of the local decision module, after which the routine returns to block 835 to re-attempt to synchronize the local model and the intermediate shared model of the local decision module.
  • routine continues instead to block 880 .
  • routine continues to block 895 to determine whether to continue, such as until an explicit indication to terminate or suspend operation of the routine 800 is received, such as to reflect an end to operation of the target system and/or an end to use of the local decision module and/or a collective group of multiple decision modules to control the target system. If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 805 , and otherwise continues to block 899 and ends.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a routine 900 performed for a representative generic target system, with respect to interactions between the target system and one or more decision modules that are controlling at least a portion of the target system.
  • the routine may, for example, be provided by execution of a target system 360 and/or 370 of FIG. 3 , and/or a target system 160 and/or 170 of FIGS. 1 and 2 , such as to implement operations specific to the target system.
  • the illustrated embodiment of the routine focuses on interactions of the target system with the one or more decision modules, and that many or all such target systems will perform many other operations in a manner specific to those target systems that are not illustrated here for the purpose of brevity.
  • the routine begins at block 910 , where it optionally provides initial state information for the target system to a CDD system for use in an automated control system of the CDD system for the target system, such as in response to a request from the CDD system or its automated control system for the target system, or instead based on configuration specific to the target system (e.g., to be performed upon startup of the target system).
  • the routine continues to block 920 to receive one or more inputs from a collective group of one or more decision modules that implement the automated control system for the target system, including one or more modified values for or other manipulations of one or more control elements of a plurality of elements of the target system that are performed by one or more such decision modules of the automated control system.
  • the blocks 920 , 930 , 940 may be repeatedly performed for each of multiple time periods, which may vary greatly in time depending on the target system (e.g., a microsecond, a millisecond, a hundredth of a second, a tenth of a second, a second, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, a minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, an hour, etc.).
  • the routine continues to block 930 to perform one or more actions in the target system based on the inputs received, including to optionally produce one or more resulting outputs or other results within the target system based on the manipulations of the control elements.
  • the routine then optionally provides information about the outputs or other results within the target system and/or provides other current state information for the target system to the automated control system of the CDD system and/or to particular decision modules of the automated control system.
  • the routine then continues to block 995 to determine whether to continue, such as until an explicit indication to terminate or suspend operation of the target system is received. If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 920 to begin a next set of control actions for a next time period, and otherwise continues to block 999 and ends.
  • state information that is provided to a particular decision module may include requests from external systems to the target system, which the automated control system and its decision modules may determine how to respond to in one or more manners.
  • one or more specified embodiments of the Collaborative Distributed Decision system are each referred to as a Collaborative Distributed Inferencing (CDI) system or a Cooperative Distributed Inferencing Platform (CDIP), in which one or more specified embodiments of the Decision Module Construction component are each referred to as the “Rules Builder” or including or being performed by a “Rule Conversion Engine” (RCE) or a “CDL Compiler” or a “Rule(s) Entry Interface” (REI) or a “Rules and Goals UI”, in which one or more specified embodiments of the Control Action Determination component are each referred to as having “chattering” subcomponents or performing “chattering” functionality or including or being performed by a “Query Response Engine” (QRE) or an “Optimization Element” or via “Hamiltonian-Chattering Control”, in which one or more specified embodiments of the Coordinated Control Management component are each referred to as having or performing “
  • CDI is built using a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) based distributed architecture that allows for partitioning the overall optimization problem into smaller sub-tasks or work-loads between peer agents.
  • CDI Peer Agents are equally privileged participants in the application domain. They are configured to form a peer-to-peer network of nodes. This allows each agent in the network to solve the problem independently, using its own internal knowledge base. Each agent also internally engages in Pareto game playing to reach internal optimum before sharing changes with other agents. The agents then communicate the mean field changes with other agents in the network using a gossip protocol to synchronize their internal mean field approximation in an eventually consistent fashion.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a network diagram 1000 of a portion of a distributed architecture of an example CDI system.
  • the seed agent nodes can be started in any order and it is not necessary to have all the seed agent nodes running.
  • initializing the CDI cluster at least one seed agent node is preferably running, otherwise the other CDI seed nodes may not become initialized and other CDI agent nodes might not join the cluster.
  • Each agent has a built-in registry of active CDI agent nodes in the cluster.
  • This agent registry is started on all CDI agent nodes and is updated with every change in cluster membership including new agents joining the cluster, agents leaving the cluster, agent timeouts etc. Agents inform each other of active membership through a heartbeat mechanism.
  • the registry is eventually consistent, i.e. changes may not immediately be visible at other nodes, but typically they will be fully replicated to all other nodes after a few seconds.
  • the changed are propagated using the change deltas and are disseminated in a scalable way to other nodes with a gossip protocol.
  • the CDI agent nodes in the cluster monitor each other by sending heartbeats to detect if a CDI agent node is unreachable from the rest of the CDI cluster.
  • the heartbeat arrival times is interpreted by an implementation of the Phi Accrual Failure Detector (Hayashibara, Défago, Yared, & Katayama, 2004).
  • the suspicion level of failure is given by a value called phi.
  • the basic idea of the phi failure detector is to express the value of phi on a scale that is dynamically adjusted to reflect current network conditions.
  • Phi ⁇ log 10(1 ⁇ F (timeSinceLastHeartbeat))
  • F is the cumulative distribution function of a normal distribution with mean and standard deviation estimated from historical heartbeat inter-arrival times.
  • CDI agent node Once a CDI agent node becomes network partitioned it will stop receiving mean field updates from the other agents in the Cluster. This however, should not prevent it from continuing to perform local optimizations based on its internal knowledge base, local mean field and sensor inputs that it will continue to receive.
  • the Rules Builder contains the following components:
  • the Master Agent is responsible for interaction with all Chattering components, including the following:
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a network diagram 1100 of a portion of an example Rules Builder component.
  • the Rules Entry Interface is responsible for receiving rules in a syntax familiar to a domain expert.
  • the entry interface is a text entry tool where a domain expert would insert the rules, goal and system information (rules script(s)) to provide continuous control suggestions for a given problem.
  • the entered rules script(s) would be composed in the CDI Domain-Specific Language (DSL).
  • the CDI DSL facilitates functional translation of the entered rules script(s) into a problem definition which houses the control definitions (measurable variable with ranges allowed and any associated constraints on the control variable).
  • the entry interface is also responsible for facilitating a domain expert to provide certain settings that are used by the system as well as providing user workflow steps.
  • the settings provided represent key: value terms used by the system and are available throughout by the Settings Provider encapsulated within the Rules Engine.
  • An domain expert might write initial values of the following form:
  • the CDL Compiler is responsible for the conversion of said rules into evaluatable constraints, system information and an optimization goal.
  • the CDI Compiler translates the entered script(s) into a problem definition.
  • a problem definition is composed of labeled rules.
  • a rule is a tuple comprised of a unique name and a Term.
  • a Term is an evaluatable function where the logic was authored as previously described above, the input to which contains a representation of the system state (StateMap).
  • the Validator is responsible for the validation of converted constraints with regards to restrictions the optimization problem needs to satisfy as a prerequisite to its solution and/or reaching a solution quality threshold.
  • the Rules Engine defines and implements several interfaces for acquiring the values of these mathematical expressions, as later described with respect to “chattering” components.
  • the Rules Engine is compiled as an artifact available to the Chattering component by the Compiler and made available for use in continuous processing.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a network diagram 1200 of example sub-components of an example Rules Builder component, in which compilation is dependent upon successful Validation of the observability, completeness, controllability, and workflow step validation. Any errors/warnings are returned to the domain expert for correction. Once corrections/improvements are complete, a new Compiled Rules Engine artifact is produced along with new commands delivered to the Step Processor.
  • the rules builder is also responsible for facilitating the workflow steps an individual domain expert would need to undertake before deploying such a system. These steps include:
  • the workflow component allows for training and testing a system. This is integrated into the DSL in the form of a workflow step builder.
  • a domain expert instructs the default bootstrapper to be used in loading predefined sensor data, train the system on this data, persist the trained model output to the file ‘/tmp/model’, then once trained to begin running the system (as a single agent).
  • the inputs are tested by analyzing the results from the run.
  • the artifacts and model information are persisted to a persistent store.
  • the Steps Processor facilitates the dispatch of interpreted workflow steps to the Remote Control for delegation to the Master Agent of a running system for processing.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a network diagram 1300 of interactions of portions of a Rules Builder component with an executing agent, including the Steps processor, the Remote Control and interactions with a running agent (the Step Processor handles interpretation of workflow steps, and the steps are delivered for dispatch by the Remote Control, which passes commands to the Master Agent; the Master Agent handles communication between a running system's controlled elements and the Remote Control, and examples of the Controlled Elements are the Trainer and Runner).
  • the Step Processor handles interpretation of workflow steps, and the steps are delivered for dispatch by the Remote Control, which passes commands to the Master Agent
  • the Master Agent handles communication between a running system's controlled elements and the Remote Control, and examples of the Controlled Elements are the Trainer and Runner).
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a network diagram 1400 of interactions of portions of a Rules Builder component with chattering components, including a Running Agent that delivers messages and interacts with the chattering components to facilitate training and running the system (the Trainer persists its model once training has completed; The Trainer invokes a Bootstrapper for acquisition of training data; The Trainer utilizes the Chattering Library; The Trainer utilizes the Chattering Library; Chattering utilizes the compiled rules; Chattering persists its control suggestions; Bootstrapper persists training data).
  • a Running Agent that delivers messages and interacts with the chattering components to facilitate training and running the system
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a diagram 1500 of a sliding window for use with chattering, and is referred to in the text for the example embodiment as “FIG. 1 ”, while FIG. 16 illustrates a diagram 1600 of using Lebesgue integration to approximate a control trajectory for chattering, and is referred to in the text for the example embodiment as “FIG. 2 ”.
  • the incremental state equation (for ⁇ z) relies on the Jacobian matrix evaluated at the beginning of the time window.
  • A(t 0 ) the Jacobian matrix evaluated at the beginning of the time window.
  • A(t) the Jacobian matrix evaluated at the beginning of the time window.
  • ⁇ dot over ( ⁇ ) ⁇ ( t,t 0 ) A ( t ) ⁇ ( t,t 0 )
  • ⁇ ⁇ 1 ( t,t 0 ) ⁇ ( t 0 ,t ).
  • the procedure to choose T is to ask the customer what size of error is tolerable.
  • the customer may say an error of 20% is tolerable, in which case the window length T can increase until reaching the associated threshold.
  • the measure of the error is related to the difference
  • the size of the time slice ⁇ is related to the magnitude of the largest eigenvalue of
  • CDI multi-agent self-organizing architecture
  • all agents synchronize in some way. This is analogous in the worst case to the many-body problem, which Isaac Newton first formulated, and is unsolvable for three or more bodies. However, good approximations for systems of more than two bodies are computationally tractable.
  • the approach in CDI is to solve a series of two-body problems that emulate a mean field aggregation, and update sequentially through a Pareto game.
  • the N problem in a single optimization problem is not algorithmically solvable, but it is possible to solve algorithmically a Pareto-optimization problem with two players (the Pareto game), and approximate the solution to the N player problem.
  • the two-agent (agent 1 and agent 2) Pareto-optimization problem is
  • each agent i plays a two-agent game with the CDI Mean Field agent composed of the criteria from all other agents except agent i.
  • CDI Mean Field agent composed of the criteria from all other agents except agent i.
  • the Hamiltonians are additive for Pareto optimization. Therefore, we can add local Hamiltonians for individual agents to create an aggregate mean field Hamiltonian.
  • the mean field Hamiltonian for agent i is a functional form of the Hamiltonians of the other agents.
  • the state consists of [x i ,x i MF ] T , the costate is [p i ,p i MF ] T , and the control is [u i ,u i MF ] T .
  • the initial conditions for x i MF and p i MF come from the previous solution, and u i is the local solution from the previous pass.
  • H i T ⁇ 1 H i + ⁇ 2 H i MF
  • the modified Hamiltonian for agent i is constructed by projecting the total Hamiltonian into the local state space.
  • the modified mean field Hamiltonian is constructed by projecting the total Hamiltonian into the mean field state space.
  • the another agent plays the game, solving the two-agent Pareto game, and updating locally, and each agent updates its mean field agent when it is ready to play its game.
  • the Cooperative Distributed Inference (CDI) platform is a unique advanced technology offering to enable near-optimal and near-real-time decision making on vast amount of heterogeneous and distributed information, in complex knowledge-based decision support systems, combining absolute, hard and soft rules to handle various requirements from natural or governing laws, policies, and best practices.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates a diagram 1700 of various interactions of different portions of a CDI system.
  • the CDI platform features a Distributed Architecture (DA) for resolving queries by accessing information from both an Internal Heterogeneous Database (IHDB) and external data sources referred to as Sensors.
  • DA Distributed Architecture
  • IHDB Internal Heterogeneous Database
  • Sensors external data sources referred to as Sensors.
  • CDI utilizes a network of computing devices as its nodes—called Decision Elements (DE)—that cooperate to resolve queries given to them.
  • the Decision Elements (DE) in a given DA can work together to reach best outcome for the whole group, i.e., reaching Pareto Efficiency (also referred to as Pareto equilibrium)—a stable state where no change by any individual can be made to make the sum of whole group better.
  • Pareto Efficiency also referred to as Pareto equilibrium
  • DE can solve the problem independently if provided with complete knowledge and data.
  • DE solves the query with a very unique approach, using Optimal Control Theory, starting with a technique called analytic continuation (transforming query and rules into differential equations whose dependent variables represent internal variables and parameters of the rules), then using its own internal knowledge to solve the query, providing an outcome.
  • analytic continuation transforming query and rules into differential equations whose dependent variables represent internal variables and parameters of the rules
  • group of Decision Elements synchronize in an iterative process utilizing updates from other DEs and provide a final result, via a Pareto multi criteria optimization strategy.
  • the CDI platform needs rules, not necessarily exact criteria, to reach the objective state, producing the near-optimal solution. This is a very attractive feature when exact quantitative criteria cannot be provided in advance due to uncertainty or other reasons.
  • CDI is perfect for big data analytics, supporting many data types:
  • CDI's distributed computing architecture also make it very scalable to handle large amount (peta-size) of heterogeneous data ingestion while performing real-time analytic results even in microseconds (depending in part on resources available and the complexity of queries).
  • CDI can integrate different types of business rules: absolute, hard and soft rules, from natural or government laws, operational or policy requirements, and practice guidelines. Absolute rules and hard rules always take logic value 0 (false) or 1 (true) when instantiated. Soft rules, however, may take any value in the interval [0, 1], or more generally more than two values. Absolute rules reflects a must-satisfy situation, such as FDA/USDA requirements; hard rules are operational requirements such as “no serious persistent side effects”, but which may be temporarily relaxed in specific situations; and soft rules can come from guidelines or experiences, such as “better not give drug XYZ to diabetes patients with heart problems”.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates a diagram 1800 of examples of different types of rules. Please note that all chaining of the rules may happen automatically in a dynamic manner during the optimization process. CDI handles this complexity with said techniques above by solving a distributed continuous-space optimization problem.
  • CDI platform features a self-learning design. As CDI converts the original query solving into an optimal control problem, it can use feedbacks from the environment (external sensor or internal updates from peer decision elements) to refine its internal model: a Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman equation will be updated to reflect new information and automatically form soft-rule like constraints internally.
  • the process to update internal mathematical model is similar to reconstructing 3D images from CT or MRI imaging by tomographic reconstruction, but used for dynamic systems.
  • CDI platform enables functionality to:
  • CDI stands out in being able to do the following things:
  • CDI platform works great in areas where there are a lot of heterogeneous data, government compliances and business requirements, such as healthcare and energy.
  • a Clinical Auto-Coding (C.A.C.) application can be used to detect medical under-coding, over-coding, and miscoding, highlighting potential opportunities where higher billing is justified. It automatically generates clinical codes, including ICD-10 directly from clinical encounter notes such as physician notes, lab results, and discharge records, while supporting workflows accommodating the roles played by administrators, coders and doctors in coding.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates an example user interface 1900 related to medical/clinical auto-coding.
  • C.A.C. incorporates user feedback to learn coding best practices as it processes records. With its sophisticated adaptive technology, C.A.C. improves over time, optimizing coding for each organization to improve the efficiency, accuracy and revenue capture of the medical coding activity
  • CDI powers the following intelligent healthcare services that can be easily integrated:
  • CDI helps assess and monitor risk of medical fraud, waste and abuse (FWA) by uncovering providers, and to a lesser extent pharmacies, who are suspected of having committed fraud via a variety of schemes. Similar application domains include financial frauds.
  • a FWA service By ingesting a wide variety of data that is difficult to link (including live public data), a FWA service analyzes data to find evidence and patterns of fraud, and provides a dashboard application for agents/detectives to prioritize and act on the discovered suspected cases of medical fraud.
  • the service features strict and fuzzy rules-based detection as well as automatic pattern discovery, and runs in real-time and continuous mode to support proactive monitoring and action.
  • Smart Grid can involve uncertain bi-directional exchange in distributed grids, so intelligent control can be used to provide active synchronization between the network of element controllers and the outside grid management system allows high quality of service to be maintained in a cost-effective manner, hence the dynamics can be learned from sensory observations.
  • CDI enables distributed micro-grid control, supports inductive modeling with “soft” rules that are learned and continuously updated, to optimize the grid.
  • the DA is a network of interacting components called decision elements (DEs).
  • DEs collaborate in the resolution of a query posed by one of them.
  • the DA's block diagram is shown in FIG. 18 , where Sensors refer to external input data in general. There is an additional translation layer to process external data to be consumed by DEs.
  • a decision element is a higher-level functional component solving queries locally. It can have subcomponents such as a programmable search engine, internal heterogeneous database, Inference engine, Inference rule base, API/user interface, and network interface.
  • a decision element is capable of providing a quick and near-optimal solution to a complex query with complete input of data.
  • IHDB Internal Heterogeneous Database
  • EKB External Knowledge Base
  • IHDB is data preprocessed and stored by a specific decision element (DE).
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a diagram 2000 of some components of a CDI system, including Knowledge Bases containing data sources ranging from domain knowledge to general facts. IHDB encodes knowledge into knowledge components (KC's). Each KC is used and updated by a DE in the DA, and multiple KCs may share rules.
  • DE decision element
  • EKB External Knowledge Base
  • data refers to data, including rules, as input into specific decision elements, such as patient's body temperature, blood pressure, or instantiated rule to determine if patient's cholesterol level is high.
  • EKB can also contain communicated information from other DEs. Domains for variables include: real, complex, integer, binary numbers and symbolic token on finite domains.
  • the following components act between users and the data via API and/or GUI.
  • MFG Minimization Function Generator
  • the minimization function generator converts a query to a minimization function (i.e. analytic continuation). This is useful because the problem is converted from search problem in a large discrete space (like graph search problems, which are usually NP-complete) into an optimization problem in continuous space (polynomial algorithms exist).
  • An analogy is NP-hard integer programming, while continuous linear programming has a very efficient solution.
  • the Query Response Engine is the core of the whole system responsible solving the query (locally).
  • a mathematical model is constructed based on these equations obtained from previous steps, containing the current state and object state (goal state).
  • the continuous-space optimization automatically handles forward and backward rule chaining by moving along the trajectory toward target state. It also manages uncertainty by keeping a large set of possible states and reducing the solution space only when more information becomes available.
  • Standard optimization techniques e.g. Newton-Raphson Method
  • the Pareto Multi-Criteria Optimization Engine is the aggregation step where all DE in the network settle to obtain a good stable solution—a state where no improvements can be made to any individual DE without reducing the whole team's performance—a state belongs Pareto Optimal Set in Game Theory. It is like each DE is playing a game and they communicate and interact and work together to make the best outcome for the criteria (query). To efficiently synchronize all decision elements, Mean Field Theory is applied for dimension reduction using knowledge obtained.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a diagram 2100 of performing Pareto processing for use with mean field techniques, including to reach Pareto efficiency.
  • the system can take many different data types via ingestion API and has adapters from different public data sources.
  • the supported data types include common ones from XML, CSV, TSV, SQL, Spreadsheet, JSON, and more. OData support is also available.
  • Output types can be API (XML or JSON), as well as exporting to CSV, SQL or directly to services such as SOLR and Cassandra.
  • CDI can run in the cloud as Software as a Service platform. We can provide whole end-to-end support by setting up the infrastructure in a Virtual Private Cloud or deploy and configure it with the cluster clients provide.
  • the system features SaaS architecture and provides APIs to be used by third parties. For advanced integration requests, Java/Scala and Python libraries are available.
  • CDI platform utilizes many advanced techniques from Mean Field Theory, Lagrangian and Hamiltonian functions, Pareto Optimal Set, Gauge Theory, and so on derived from modern mathematics, quantum physics, optimal control and game theory to achieve high performance.
  • lots of transformation, approximation, optimization, caching and other advanced computing techniques are used to improve accuracy, speed and scalability. Due to this unique approach, CDI is able to solve complex decision making problem in a smoothly, efficient manner and achieve near optimal results.
  • the Cooperative Distributed Inference (CDI) platform is a unique advanced technology offering to enable near-optimal and near real-time decision making on vast amount of heterogeneous and distributed information, in complex knowledge-based decision support systems, combining absolute, hard and soft rules to handle various requirements from natural or governing laws, policies, and best practices.
  • Each agent in the Distributed Architecture is a Decision Element that can solve the problem independently, provided with knowledge base and data.
  • the agent uses Optimal Control Theory to obtain a near optimal solution, starting with a technique called analytic continuation (transforming query and rules into differential equations whose dependent variables represent internal variables and parameters of the rules), then using its own internal knowledge to solve the problem as an optimization problem in continuous space, to allow for efficient solving.
  • the outcome will be fed back to the Rules Editor and optimization process (the Chattering algorithm) to enable automatic adjustment of weights of soft rules (constraints) and achieve optimal score of the objective function.
  • a CDI agent is an independent decision element that can take in sensor data (input from the environment, streaming or in batches), as well as the knowledge-bases (rules composed by domain experts, including absolute, hard and soft rules) to generate a set of partial differential functions (Lagrangian constraints), through continualization. Similarly, the objective is also converted into a minimization function, as part of the Lagrangians which will be solved via the Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman equation. Each agent will talk to other agents via a “mean field” abstraction layer to greatly reduce the communication and computation overhead, and incorporate additional information to reach the global optimal state (a stable, near optimal set of states across all agents). Finally, the agent exercises control over the system.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a network diagram 2200 of an example decision module agent.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a network diagram 2300 of an example of offline workflows for knowledge capture.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a network diagram 2400 of an example of workflows for mean field computation and Pareto Optimal.
  • An example home solar micro-grid system illustrates one example embodiment of a CDI application or automated control system, which takes the sensor data from the solar panel (in the house), substation, and power network, and decides whether or not to fulfill the utility requests in real time using a set of complex rules.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a network diagram 2500 of an example of an automated control system for a home solar micro-grid electrical generating system.
  • FIGS. 26-28 provide further details regarding operations of portions of example CDI systems and their sub-components
  • FIGS. 29A-29K illustrate examples of using a CDI system to iteratively determine near-optimal solutions over time for controlling a target system in diagrams 2900 A- 2900 K.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates a further diagram 2600 of workflow and components of a portion of a CDI system
  • FIG. 28 illustrates a diagram 2800 of an overview workflow for a portion of a CDI system
  • FIG. 27 illustrates a diagram 2700 of workflow for an inference process portion of a CDI system.
  • target systems include, for example, a vehicle being controlled, controlling inventory management, controlling a micro-grid electrical generation facility, controlling activities in a day trader financial setting, etc.
  • CDIP Cooperative Distributed Inferencing Platform
  • DA Distributed Architecture
  • IHDB Internal Heterogeneous Database
  • the architecture implements a network of active devices at its nodes. These devices are called Decision Elements (DE's).
  • DE's cooperate in the resolution of a query posed to one or several of them.
  • the DE's in a given DA are referred to as the team.
  • Every DE in a team is programmed to transform rules in its domain, determined by a posed query, into an ordinary differential equation (ODE), whose dependent variables represent internal variables and parameters.
  • ODE ordinary differential equation
  • the dependent variables include unknowns of the query posed to the DE.
  • the DE's in the architecture are synchronized via a Pareto multi criteria optimization strategy.
  • the components of the CDIP include:
  • Subcomponents are fundamental parts of the architecture that perform particular roles. This section contains descriptions for each of the subcomponents of the architecture. The subcomponents are:
  • the DA is a platform of interacting components called DE's.
  • the DE's collaborate in the resolution of a query posed by one of them.
  • the DE's implement a distributed, dynamic optimization process, herein referred as the optimization process (OP).
  • OP implements an optimization process that computes an answer to the active queries as a function of data stored in two categories of repositories: IHDB and EKB's. These repositories of the data needed to implement OP given a query.
  • the EKB's are a collection of public or private repositories of knowledge relevant to the DE posing a query.
  • a DE has a list of external repositories (LER). Each entry in an LER includes 1) a protocol, 2) a heading sub-list, and 3) a translation grammar. Each protocol entry prescribes the access procedure to the corresponding knowledge repository. Each heading sub-list entry contains a summary of the knowledge contents of the corresponding repository. Finally, each translation grammar entry provides a procedure for converting knowledge elements of the corresponding repository in to the rule representation in the IHDB of the DE.
  • the Internal Heterogeneous Database (IHDB)
  • the IHDB encodes knowledge about the implemented application.
  • the IHDB is divided into knowledge components (KC's). Each KC is consulted and updated by a DE in the DA. Any pair of KC's may have an overlapping set of rules by which they operate, but there is no a priori constraint on intersections or inclusion.
  • the collection of KC's constitutes the existing knowledge of the system.
  • a KC is a collection of rules, written in a restrictive Horn clause format.
  • the rules are logic entities. When a rule is instantiated, it has a logic value.
  • the logic values a rule can have are taken from the interval [0, 1].
  • the entire system of rules is evaluated using variables and parameters which are collectively referred to as the generalized coordinates of the system and are indexed as follows:
  • the time argument t refers to the algorithmic time of the system which means that it has no other meaning than as a continuous index with respect to the evolution of the system. There is therefore no requirement that it correspond to a physical aspect of the system although this may naturally occur. Physical time may be represented specifically by a canonical coordinate of choice q (i) (t). Alternatively, we may refer to the q's without expressly stating the independent time argument and write
  • the rules in each knowledge component are of three types: absolute rules, hard rules, and soft rules.
  • Absolute rules and hard rules take logic value 0 (false) or 1 (true) when instantiated.
  • Soft rules take any value in the interval [0, 1].
  • a Horn Clause is an object composed of two objects a HEAD and a BODY connected by backward Implication ( ).
  • the logic implication transfers the logic value of the BODY to the HEAD. If the rule is an absolute rule or a hard rule, the logic value is 1 (if the BODY is logically true) or 0 (if the BODY is logically false). If the rule is a soft rule, the logic value transferred by the body is any number in [0, 1].
  • the list of arguments includes variables and parameters.
  • the variables take values in the domain of the rule and the parameters are constants passed to the rule and unchanged by the instantiation of the rule.
  • the domain of the rule is a set of values that each of its variables can take.
  • variables can take values over numerical or symbolic domains.
  • a symbolic domain can be a list of diseases.
  • a numeric domain can be a set of pairs of numbers representing blood pressure.
  • the domains for variables are: real numbers, complex numbers (floating point and floating point complex numbers), integer numbers, binary numbers and symbolic token on finite domains.
  • the BODY of a clause is a data structure composed of one or more terms, denoted ⁇ i (q).
  • the composition operation is extended- and, denoted by: ⁇ .
  • a rule with a head but not a body is called a fact.
  • a fact's truth value is determined on the basis of the instantiation of its variables.
  • Each term in the body of a rule is an extended disjunction (or denoted by v) of sub-terms.
  • the v operator behaves like the standard- or for absolute and hard rules and behaves in a functional form, described later, when connecting sub-terms encoding heads of soft rules.
  • a sub-term is either the HEAD of a rule, a relation or a truth valuation (TV).
  • TV truth valuation
  • a rule When a rule has a sub-term that is the head of another rule it is said that the two rules are chained together by the corresponding sub-term. Note that a rule can be chained to several rules via corresponding sub-terms.
  • Constraint domains augment the BODY clause of Horn clauses to facilitate dynamic programming. Constraints are specified as a relationship between terms. Define the relationship between two terms
  • a relation can be of two types numeric or symbolic. Numeric relations establish equational forms between two functional forms. (For the initial phase only polynomial and affine linear functional forms will be considered.)
  • an equational form is a set of one or more relations.
  • the table below gives the relations considered and their symbols.
  • the adopted code forms are the ones used in constraint logic programming.
  • a symbolic relation can be of two types: inclusion and constraint.
  • Inclusion relations are of the form:
  • x is a variable or a parameter
  • is the inclusion symbol
  • Set is a set of symbolic forms or a set of numbers or a composite set of the form shown in the table below.
  • a TV is either a variable or a constant with values in the interval [0, 1].
  • the TV of a Horn Clause that is an absolute rule or a hard rule can only take two values: 1 or 0.
  • the TV when instantiated is 0 or 1. If the TV for an absolute or hard rule is 1, the rule is said to be in inactive state; if the TV is 0, the rule is said to be in active state.
  • the soft clause is said to be in inactive state.
  • T threshold is a constant in [0, 1] defined for each soft clause.
  • the default value is 0.5.
  • sub-term A sub-term may be a Horn clause, a relation between two other sub-terms or an extended truth valuation depending on the context of absolute, hard or soft rules. In the case of absolute and hard rules it may be evaluated as a proposition. In the case of soft rules it takes a value on the interval [0, 1] and is considered to be active or true in the case that it exceeds its specific threshold.
  • goal clause A Horn clause with no positive terms.
  • inactive state The case when a rule will not apply for constrained optimization.
  • active state The case when a rule will apply for constrained optimization.
  • truth value, TV The value that is used to determine whether a rule is active or inactive.
  • the clause body includes other clauses: bp (blood pressure) and wc (white count).
  • the Rule Entry Interface provides a mechanism for:
  • the Rule Editor allows users to specify rules associated with the systems to be interrogated.
  • the rule conversion engine converts rules of the IHDB into equations.
  • ⁇ ⁇ ( q ) ⁇ T q ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ F q ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ( 3.6 ⁇ - ⁇ 1 )
  • ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ( q ) ⁇ 1 ⁇ ⁇ ( q ) ⁇ T 0 ⁇ ⁇ ( q ) ⁇ F ( 3.6 ⁇ - ⁇ 3 )
  • Tail recursion is propositionally defined as
  • ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ( n , q ) h ⁇ ⁇ ( n - 1 , q ) + ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ( n , q ) ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ( n - 1 , q ) - 1 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ( n , q ) ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ( n - 1 , q ) ( 3.6 ⁇ - ⁇ 13 )
  • a diagram of the Decision Element Architecture is shown in illustration ⁇ . It is composed six elements:
  • a DE has a List of External Repositories (LER). Each entry in an LER includes 1) a protocol, 2) a heading sub-list, and 3) a translation grammar. Each protocol entry prescribes the access procedure to the corresponding external knowledge repository. Each heading sub-list entry contains a summary of the knowledge contents of the corresponding repository. Finally, each translation grammar entry provides a procedure for converting knowledge elements of the corresponding repository in to the rule representation in the IHDB of the DE.
  • the programmable search engine implements a standard hashing algorithm for detecting active rules as a function of the current instantiation of the variables in a variable buffer (VB) of the IE, and the contents of the active rule buffer (ARB).
  • the VB contains the variables that form part of the query and all additional variables incorporated to this buffer during the inference process (IP).
  • IP inference process
  • the VB includes all relevant data from the EKB beneficial to perform the query.
  • the IP will be described below.
  • the ARB contains all the currently active rules in the IP.
  • the search hashing algorithm is characterized by the search rules in the Inference Rule Base.
  • the IHDB is the repository of the application clauses associated with the DE. These encode the domain of knowledge characterizing the expertise of the DE. For example in a medical application, a decision element may deal with expertise on heart illnesses, and the corresponding clauses might encode diagnoses and treatments for these diseases.
  • the IE encodes an algorithm, the IP, for assigning values to the variables appearing in the query.
  • the DE incorporates inference rules (IR) that are a collection of rules for transforming and inferring instantiations of the goal. These rules provide the Inference Engine with directives for processing database rules to give a satisfactory instantiation to a given query or to request additional information so that a satisfactory instantiation can be generated. They are organized according to their functionality as follows. (See Illustration PP)
  • These rules include the formal rules for inference. This includes all rules for natural language modeling from first principles.
  • These rules include rules for finding the interior point in optimization.
  • These rules include rules for identifying the nature of insufficient potential.
  • the goal is to apply these rules to acquire additional information required to satisfy the optimization goal.
  • Adaptation rules are used to update the soft rules to relax them further to reduce the complexity and constrains of the optimization problem.
  • the adaptation also serves to update the search rules to improve information acquisition.
  • the rules define how other rules may be combined.
  • the UI provides the utilities for entering queries, pragma rules, displaying query answers, status and for general interaction with the IE.
  • the NI provides a generic mechanism for interacting with other DE's via a procedure termed companionship.
  • the companionship procedure implements the active coupling for the cooperation of the DE's in query resolution. This procedure is not hierarchical and implements a Pareto Agreement set strategy as the mechanism for Ca
  • MFG Minimization Function Generator
  • the minimization function generator converts a query to a minimization function.
  • a satisfied query represented as an equation is also a set
  • V ⁇ ⁇ i + ⁇ 0 1 - ⁇ ⁇ i ⁇ ( q ) ⁇ 0 ⁇ 1 - ⁇ ⁇ i ⁇ ( q ) ⁇ 0 ( 3.10 ⁇ - ⁇ 5 )
  • each of the v total independent variables of (•) is mapped to its corresponding position in q(t), the column vector that is represented with a lower-case q.
  • the independent variable t refers algorithmic time as opposed to physical time which may also be represented in the system.
  • a given decision element, DE k has the following associated parameters which are constituent to the ARB:
  • the ARB has the following components which determine the constraints of DE k :
  • H k (A) F k (A) ( H 1 (T) , . . . ,H k ⁇ 1 (T) ,H k+1 (T) , . . . ,H K (T) ) (3.13-4)
  • Determining the relaxed Pareto optimal point of the system is a process which includes:
  • Illustration SS shows how decision elements interact with the network, receive queries, and return results.
  • the distributed system effectively implements an abstract classifier that has no real implementation.
  • the DE's receive sensor data from the network which includes new available information which may benefit classification.
  • the user submits a query that is received by a DE which then returns a result.
  • n 1, . . . , N
  • the (2N ⁇ M′)-dimensional constraint surface ⁇ m (q, p) should be covered of open region: in each region the constraints can be split into independent constraints
  • ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ m ′ ⁇ p n , q ( n ) ⁇ [ ⁇ ⁇ 1 ⁇ p 1 , q ( 1 ) ... ⁇ ⁇ 1 ⁇ p n , q ( n ) ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ m ′ ⁇ p 1 , q ( 1 ) ... ⁇ ⁇ m ′ ⁇ p n , q ( n ) ]
  • the Hamiltonian defined by (3.14-15) is not unique as a function of p, q. This can be inferred from (3.14-18) by noticing that ⁇ p n
  • n 1, . . . , N ⁇ are not all independent. They are restricted to preserve the primary constraints ⁇ m ⁇ 0 which are identities when the p's are expressed as functions of q's via (3.14-16).
  • ⁇ n 1 N ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ m ⁇ p n ,
  • the Hamiltonian Equations (3.14-23) can be derived from the following variational principle:
  • the basic consistency condition is that the primary constraints be preserved in time. So for
  • This equation can either reduce to a relation independent of the u (m′) , or, it may impose a restriction on the u's.
  • K is the total number of secondary constraints.
  • K is the total number of secondary constraints.
  • Equation (3.14-32) can be written as
  • ⁇ j is numerically restricted to be zero but does not vanish throughout the space. What this is means is that ⁇ j has non-zero Poisson brackets with the canonical variables.
  • ⁇ m 1 M ⁇ V ( m ) ⁇ [ ⁇ j , ⁇ m ] ⁇ 0 ( 3.14 ⁇ - ⁇ 38 )
  • a function of the canonical variables that is not first class is called second class.
  • H′ defined by (3.14-49) and ⁇ ⁇ defined by (3.14-50) are first class functions.
  • Gauge transformations are transformations that do not change the physical state.
  • accelerations ⁇ umlaut over (q) ⁇ (i) are uniquely determined by the q (j) and ⁇ dot over (q) ⁇ (i) .
  • constraints of the form of (E--11) are referred to as primary constraints.
  • the derivation above is based on a Lagrangian, quadratic in the velocity terms, it is generally valid for Lagrangians which depend on q and ⁇ dot over (q) ⁇ but not on higher derivatives.
  • ⁇ p ⁇ ⁇ (p, q)
  • 1, . . . , N ⁇ R W ⁇
  • ⁇ ⁇ is defined as (E--11).
  • the Hamiltonian is only a function of ⁇ q (i)
  • i 1, . . . , N ⁇ and momenta ⁇ p a
  • a 1, . . . , R W ⁇ and does not depend on ⁇ dot over (q) ⁇ ( ⁇ )
  • 1, . . . , N ⁇ R W ⁇
  • H o H c ⁇
  • H o ( q, ⁇ p a ⁇ , ⁇ dot over (q) ⁇ (a) ⁇ ) H o ( q, ⁇ p a ⁇ ).
  • a function f is weakly equal to g denoted by f ⁇ g, if f and g are equal on the subspace defined by the primary constraints,
  • ⁇ ⁇ i 1 N ⁇ ⁇ E i ( o ) ⁇ ( q , q . , q ⁇ ) ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ q ( i ) ⁇ ⁇ t ⁇ 0 ( 3.17 ⁇ - ⁇ 1 )
  • E i ( o ) ⁇ ( q , q . , q ⁇ ) ⁇ j ⁇ [ ⁇ 2 ⁇ L ⁇ ( q , q . ) ⁇ q . ( i ) ⁇ ⁇ q ⁇ ( j ) ⁇ q ⁇ ( i ) + ⁇ 2 ⁇ L ⁇ ( q , q . ) ⁇ q . ( i ) ⁇ ⁇ q ( j ) ⁇ q . ( i ) ] - ⁇ L ⁇ ( q , q .
  • v i ( o , n o ) ⁇ k ⁇ ⁇ c k ( n o ) ⁇ w i ( o , k )
  • G (o,n o ) v (o,n o ) E (o) ⁇ 0, n o , . . . ,N o (3.17-3)
  • ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ q i ⁇ n o ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ n o ⁇ v i ( o , n o )
  • n 1 1, . . . , N 1 and the genuine constraints are of the form
  • n 1 1, . . . , N 1 on shell.
  • the iterative process will terminate at some level M if either i) there is not further zero modes, or ii) the new constraints can be expressed as linear combinations of previous constraints.
  • G ( o , n o ) u ( o , n o ) ⁇ E ( o ) ⁇ 0 ( 3.17 ⁇ - ⁇ 10 )
  • the first zero mode is the previous one augmented by one dimension and reproduces the previous constraint.
  • the second mode reproduces the negative of the constraint (3.17-21). That is,
  • the outline of the companionship process is as follows for a system of N agents.
  • routines discussed above may be provided in alternative ways, such as being split among more routines or consolidated into fewer routines.
  • illustrated routines may provide more or less functionality than is described, such as when other illustrated routines instead lack or include such functionality respectively, or when the amount of functionality that is provided is altered.
  • operations may be illustrated as being performed in a particular manner (e.g., in serial or in parallel, synchronously or asynchronously, etc.) and/or in a particular order, those skilled in the art will appreciate that in other embodiments the operations may be performed in other orders and in other manners.
  • illustrated data structures may store more or less information than is described, such as when other illustrated data structures instead lack or include such information respectively, or when the amount or types of information that is stored is altered.

Abstract

Techniques are described for implementing automated control systems that manipulate operations of specified target systems, such as by modifying or otherwise manipulating inputs or other control elements of the target system that affect its operation (e.g., affect output of the target system). An automated control system may have one or more decision modules that each controls at least some of a target system, with each decision module's control actions being automatically determined to reflect near-optimal solutions with respect to or one more goals and in light of a target system model having multiple inter-related constraints, such as based on a partially optimized solution that is within a threshold amount of a fully optimized solution. Such determination of one or more control actions to perform may occur for a particular time and particular decision module, as well as be repeated over multiple times for ongoing control.

Description

    BACKGROUND
  • Various attempts have been made to implement automated control systems for various types of physical systems that have inputs or other control elements that the control system can manipulate to attempt to provide desired output or other behavior of the physical systems being controlled. Such automated control systems have used various types of architectures and underlying computing technologies to attempt to implement such functionality, including to attempt to deal with issues related to uncertainty in the state of the physical system being controlled, the need to make control decisions in very short amounts of time to provide real-time or near-real-time control and with only partial information, etc.
  • However, various difficulties exist with existing automated control systems and their underlying architectures and computing technologies, including with respect to managing large numbers of constraints (sometimes conflicting), operating in a coordinated manner with other systems, etc.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a network diagram illustrating an example environment in which a system for performing cooperative distributed control of target systems may be configured and initiated.
  • FIG. 2 is a network diagram illustrating an example environment in which a system for performing cooperative distributed control of target systems may be implemented.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating example computing systems suitable for executing an embodiment of a system for performing cooperative distributed control of target systems in configured manners.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a Collaborative Distributed Decision (CDD) System routine.
  • FIGS. 5A-5B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Decision Module Construction routine.
  • FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a decision module routine.
  • FIGS. 7A-7B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Control Action Determination routine.
  • FIGS. 8A-8B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Coordinated Control Management routine.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a routine for a target system being controlled.
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a network diagram of a portion of a distributed architecture of an example CDI system.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a network diagram of a portion of an example Rules Builder component.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a network diagram of example sub-components of an example Rules Builder component.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a network diagram of interactions of portions of a Rules Builder component with an executing agent.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a network diagram of interactions of portions of a Rules Builder component with chattering components.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a diagram of a sliding window for use with chattering.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a diagram of using Lebesgue integration to approximate a control trajectory for chattering.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates a diagram of various interactions of different portions of a CDI system.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates a diagram of example different types of rules.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates an example user interface related to medical/clinical auto-coding.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a diagram of some components of a CU system.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a diagram of performing Pareto processing for use with mean field techniques.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a network diagram of an example decision module agent.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a network diagram of an example of offline workflows for knowledge capture.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a network diagram of an example of workflows for mean field computation and Pareto Optimal.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a network diagram of an example of an automated control system for a home solar micro-grid electrical generating system.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates a diagram of workflow and components of a portion of a CDI system.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates a diagram of a workflow for an inference process portion of a CDI system.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates a diagram of an overview workflow for a portion of a CDI system.
  • FIGS. 29A-29K illustrate examples of using a CDI system to iteratively determine near-optimal solutions over time for controlling a target system.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Techniques are described for implementing automated control systems to control or otherwise manipulate at least some operations of specified physical systems or other target systems. A target system to be controlled or otherwise manipulated may have numerous elements that are inter-connected in various manners, with a subset of those elements being inputs or other control elements that a corresponding automated control system may modify or otherwise manipulate in order to affect the operation of the target system. In at least some embodiments and situations, a target system may further have one or more outputs that the manipulations of the control elements affect, such as if the target system is producing or modifying physical goods or otherwise producing physical effects.
  • As part of implementing such an automated control system for a particular target system, an embodiment of a Collaborative Distributed Decision (CDD) system may use the described techniques to perform various automated activities involved in constructing and implementing the automated control system—a brief introduction to some aspects of the activities of the CDD system is provided here, with additional details included below. In particular, the CDD system may in some embodiments implement a Decision Module Construction component that interacts with one or more users to obtain a description of a target system, including restrictions related to the various elements of the target system, and one or more goals to be achieved during control of the target system—the Decision Module Construction component then performs various automated actions to generate, test and deploy one or more executable decision modules (also referred to at times as “decision elements” and/or “agents”) to use in performing the control of the target system. When the one or more executable decision modules are deployed and executed, the CDD system may further provide various components within or external to the decision modules being executed to manage their control of the target system, such as a Control Action Determination component of each decision module to optimize or otherwise enhance the control actions that the decision module generates, and/or one or more Coordinated Control Management components to coordinate the control actions of multiple decision modules that are collectively performing the control of the target system. Additional details related to such components of the CDD system and their automated operations are included below.
  • As noted above, the described techniques may be used to provide automated control systems for various types of physical systems or other target systems. In one or more embodiments, an automated control system is generated and provided and used to control a micro-grid electricity facility, such as at a residential location that includes one or more electricity sources (e.g., one or more solar panel grids, one or more wind turbines, etc.) and one or more electricity storage and source mechanisms (e.g., one or more batteries). The automated control system may, for example, operate at the micro-grid electricity facility (e.g., as part of a home automation system), such as to receive requests from the operator of a local electrical grid to provide particular amounts of electricity at particular times, and to control operation of the micro-grid electricity facility by determining whether to accept each such request. If a request is accepted, the control actions may further include selecting which electricity source (e.g., solar panel, battery, etc.) to use to provide the requested electricity, and otherwise the control actions may further include determine to provide electricity being generated to at least one energy storage mechanism (e.g., to charge a battery). Outputs of such a physical system include the electricity being provided to the local electrical grid, and a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, is to maximize profits for the micro-grid electricity facility from providing of the electricity. It will be appreciated that such a physical system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • In one or more embodiments, an automated control system is generated and provided and used to control a vehicle with a motor and in some cases an engine, such as an electrical bicycle in which power may come from a user who is pedaling and/or from a motor powered by a battery and/or an engine. The automated control system may, for example, operate on the vehicle or on the user, such as to control operation of the vehicle by determining whether at a current time to remove energy from the battery to power the motor (and if so to further determine how much energy to remove from the battery) or to instead add excess energy to the battery (e.g., as generated by the engine, and if so to further determine how much energy to generate from the engine; and/or as captured from braking or downhill coasting). Outputs of such a physical system include the effects of the motor to move the vehicle, and a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to move the vehicle at one or more specified speeds with a minimum of energy produced from the battery, and/or to minimize use of fuel by the engine. It will be appreciated that such a physical system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • In one or more embodiments, an automated control system is generated and provided and used to manage product inventory for one or more products at one or more locations, such as a retail location that receives products from one or more product sources (e.g., when ordered or requested by the retail location) and that provides products to one or more product recipients (e.g., when ordered or requested by the recipients). The automated control system may, for example, operate at the retail location and/or at a remote network-accessible location, such as to receive requests from product recipients for products, and to control operation of the product inventory at the one or more locations by selecting at a current time one or more first amounts of one or more products to request from the one or more product sources, and by selecting at the current time one or more second amounts of at least one product to provide to the one or more product recipients. Outputs of such a physical system include products being provided from the one or more locations to the one or more product recipients, and a goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to maximize profit of an entity operating the one or more locations while maintaining the inventory at one or more specified levels. It will be appreciated that such a physical system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • In one or more embodiments, an automated control system is generated and provided and used to manage cyber-security for physical computing resources being protected from unauthorized operations and/or to determine a risk level from information provided by or available from one or more information sources. The automated control system may, for example, operate at the location of the computing resources or information sources and/or at a remote network-accessible location, such as to receive information about attempts (whether current or past) to perform operations on computing resources being protected or about information being provided by or available from the one or more information sources, and to control operation of the cyber-security system by determine whether a change in authorization to a specified type of operation is needed and to select one or more actions to take to implement the change in authorization if so determined, and/or to determine whether a risk level exceeds a specified threshold and to select one or more actions to take to mitigate the risk level. A goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to minimize unauthorized operations that are performed and/or to minimize the risk level. It will be appreciated that such a target system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • In one or more embodiments, an automated control system is generated and provided and used to manage transactions being performed in one or more financial markets, such as to buy and/or sell physical items or other financial items. The automated control system may, for example, operate at the one or more final markets or at a network-accessible location that is remote from the one or more financial markets, such as to control operation of the transactions performed by determining whether to purchase or sell particular items at particular times and to select one or more actions to initiate transactions to purchase or sell the particular items at the particular times. A goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to maximize profit while maintaining risk below a specified threshold. It will be appreciated that such a target system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • In one or more embodiments, an automated control system is generated and provided and used to perform coding for medical procedures, such as to allow billing to occur for medical procedures performed on humans. The automated control system may, for example, operate at a location at which the medical procedures are performed or at a network-accessible location that is remote from such a medical location, such as to control operation of the coding that is performed by selecting particular medical codes to associate with particular medical procedures in specified circumstances. A goal that the automated control system implements may be, for example, to minimize errors in selected medical codes that cause revenue leakage. It will be appreciated that such a target system being controlled and a corresponding automated control system may include a variety of elements and use various types of information and perform various types of activities, with additional details regarding such an automated control system being included below.
  • It will also be appreciated that the described techniques may be used with a wide variety of other types of target systems, some of which are further discussed below, and that the invention is not limited to the techniques discussed for particular target systems and corresponding automated control systems.
  • As noted above, a Collaborative Distributed Decision (CDD) system may in some embodiments use at least some of the described techniques to perform various automated activities involved in constructing and implementing a automated control system for a specified target system, such as to modify or otherwise manipulate inputs or other control elements of the target system that affect its operation (e.g., affect one or more outputs of the target system). An automated control system for such a target system may in some situations have a distributed architecture that provides cooperative distributed control of the target system, such as with multiple decision modules that each control a portion of the target system and that operate in a partially decoupled manner with respect to each other. If so, the various decision modules' operations for the automated control system may be at least partially synchronized, such as by each reaching a consensus with one or more other decision modules at one or more times, even if a fully synchronized convergence of all decision modules at all times is not guaranteed or achieved.
  • The CDD system may in some embodiments implement a Decision Module Construction component that interacts with one or more users to obtain a description of a target system, including restrictions related to the various elements of the target system, and one or more goals to be achieved during control of the target system—the Decision Module Construction component then performs various automated actions to generate, test and deploy one or more executable decision modules to use in performing the control of the target system. The Decision Module Construction component may thus operate as part of a configuration or setup phase that occurs before a later run-time phase in which the generated decision modules are executed to perform control of the target system, although in some embodiments and situations the Decision Module Construction component may be further used after an initial deployment to improve or extend or otherwise modify an automated control system that has one or more decision modules (e.g., while the automated control system continues to be used to control the target system), such as to add, remove or modify decision modules for the automated control system.
  • In some embodiments, some or all automated control systems that are generated and deployed may further provide various components within them for execution during the runtime operation of the automated control system, such as by including such components within decision modules in some embodiments and situations. Such components may include, for example, a Control Action Determination component of each decision module (or of some decision modules) to optimize or otherwise determine and improve the control actions that the decision module generates. For example, such a Control Action Determination component in a decision module may in some embodiments attempt to automatically determine the decision module's control actions for a particular time to reflect a near-optimal solution with respect to or one more goals and in light of a model of the decision module for the target system that has multiple inter-related constraints—if so, such a near-optimal solution may be based at least in part on a partially optimized solution that is within a threshold amount of a fully optimized solution. Such determination of one or more control actions to perform may occur for a particular time and for each of one or more decision modules, as well as be repeated over multiple times for ongoing control by at least some decision modules in some situations. In some embodiments, the model for a decision module is implemented as a Hamiltonian function that reflects a set of coupled differential equations based in part on constraints representing at least part of the target system, such as to allow the model and its Hamiltonian function implementation to be updated over multiple time periods by adding additional expressions within the evolving Hamiltonian function.
  • In some embodiments, the components included within a generated and deployed automated control system for execution during the automated control system's runtime operation may further include one or more Coordinated Control Management components to coordinate the control actions of multiple decision modules that are collectively performing the control of a target system for the automated control system. For example, some or all decision modules may each include such a Control Action Determination component in some embodiments to attempt to synchronize that decision module's local solutions and proposed control actions with those of one or more other decision modules in the automated control system, such as by determining a consensus shared model with those other decision modules that simultaneously provides solutions from the decision module's local model and the models of the one or more other decision modules. Such inter-module synchronizations may occur repeatedly to determine one or more control actions for each decision module at a particular time, as well as to be repeated over multiple times for ongoing control. In addition, each decision module's model is implemented in some embodiments as a Hamiltonian function that reflects a set of coupled differential equations based in part on constraints representing at least part of the target system, such as to allow each decision module's model and its Hamiltonian function implementation to be combined with the models of one or more other decision modules by adding additional expressions for those other decision modules' models within the initial Hamiltonian function for the local model of the decision module.
  • Use of the described techniques may also provide various types of benefits in particular embodiments, including non-exclusive examples of beneficial attributes or operations as follows:
      • Infer interests/desired content in a cold start environment where textual (or other unstructured) data is available and with minimal user history;
      • Improve inference in a continuous way that can incorporate increasingly rich user histories;
      • Improve inference performance with the addition of feedback, explicit/implicit, positive/negative and preferably in a real-time or near-real-time manner;
      • Derive information from domain experts that provide business value, and embed them in inference framework;
      • Dynamically add new unstructured data that may represent new states, and update existing model in a calibrated way;
      • Renormalize inference system to accommodate conflicts;
      • Immediately do inferencing in a new environment based on a natural language model;
      • Add new information as a statistical model, and integrate with a natural language model to significantly improve inference/prediction;
      • Integrate new data and disintegrate old data in a way that only improves performance;
      • Perform inferencing in a data secure way;
      • Integrate distinct inferencing elements in a distributed network and improve overall performance;
      • Easily program rules and information into the system from a lay-user perspective;
      • Inexpensively perform computer inferences in a way that is suitable for bandwidth of mobile devices; and
      • Incorporate constraint information.
  • It will be appreciated that some embodiments may not include all some illustrative benefits, and that some embodiments may include some benefits that are not listed.
  • For illustrative purposes, some embodiments are described below in which specific types of operations are performed, including with respect to using the described techniques with particular types of target systems and to perform particular types of control activities that are determined in particular manners. These examples are provided for illustrative purposes and are simplified for the sake of brevity, and the inventive techniques may be used in a wide variety of other situations, including in other environments and with other types of automated control action determination techniques, some of which are discussed below.
  • FIG. 1 is a network diagram illustrating an example environment in which a system for performing cooperative distributed control of one or more target systems may be configured and initiated. In particular, an embodiment of a CDD system 140 is executing on one or more computing systems 190, including in the illustrated embodiment to operate in an online manner and provide a graphical user interface (GUI) (not shown) and/or other interfaces 119 to enable one or more remote users of client computing systems 110 to interact over one or more intervening computer networks 100 with the CDD system 140 to configure and create one or more decision modules to include as part of an automated control system to use with each of one or more target systems to be controlled.
  • In particular, target system 1 160 and target system 2 170 are example target systems illustrated in this example, although it will be appreciated that only one target system or numerous target systems may be available in particular embodiments and situations, and that each such target system may include a variety of mechanical, electronic, chemical, biological, and/or other types of components to implement operations of the target system in a manner specific to the target system. In this example, the one or more users (not shown) may interact with the CDD system 140 to generate an example automated control system 122 for target system 1, with the automated control system including multiple decision modules 124 in this example that will cooperatively interact to control portions of the target system 1 160 when later deployed and implemented. The process of the users interacting with the CDD system 140 to create the automated control system 122 may involve a variety of interactions over time, including in some cases independent actions of different groups of users, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere. In addition, as part of the process of creating and/or training or testing automated control system 122, it may perform one or more interactions with the target system 1 as illustrated, such as to obtain partial initial state information, although some or all training activities may in at least some embodiments include simulating effects of control actions in the target system 1 without actually implementing those control actions at that time.
  • After the automated control system 122 is created, the automated control system may be deployed and implemented to begin performing operations involving controlling the target system 1 160, such as by optionally executing the automated control system 122 on the one or more computing systems 190 of the CDD system 140, so as to interact over the computer networks 100 with the target system 1. In other embodiments and situations, the automated control system 122 may instead be deployed by executing local copies of some or all of the automated control system 122 (e.g., one or more of the multiple decision modules 124) in a manner local to the target system 1, as illustrated with respect to a deployed copy 121 of some or all of automated control system 1, such as on one or more computing systems (not shown) that are part of the target system 1.
  • In a similar manner to that discussed with respect to automated control system 122, one or more users (whether the same users, overlapping users, or completely unrelated users to those that were involved in creating the automated control system 122) may similarly interact over the computer network 100 with the CDD system 140 to create a separate automated control system 126 for use in controlling some or all of the target system 2 170. In this example, the automated control system 126 for target system 2 includes only a single decision module 128 that will perform all of the control actions for the automated control system 126. The automated control system 126 may similarly be deployed and implemented for target system 2 in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to automated control system 122, such as to execute locally on the one or more computing systems 190 and/or on one or more computing systems (not shown) that are part of the target system 2, although a deployed copy of automated control system 2 is not illustrated in this example. It will be further appreciated that the automated control systems 122 and/or 126 may further include other components and/or functionality that are separate from the particular decision modules 124 and 128, respectively, although such other components and/or functionality are not illustrated in FIG. 1.
  • The network 100 may, for example, be a publicly accessible network of linked networks, possibly operated by various distinct parties, such as the Internet, with the CDD system 140 available to any users or only certain users over the network 100. In other embodiments, the network 100 may be a private network, such as, for example, a corporate or university network that is wholly or partially inaccessible to non-privileged users. In still other embodiments, the network 100 may include one or more private networks with access to and/or from the Internet. Thus, while the CDD system 140 in the illustrated embodiment is implemented in an online manner to support various users over the one or more computer networks 100, in other embodiments a copy of the CDD system 140 may instead be implemented in other manners, such as to support a single user or a group of related users (e.g., a company or other organization), such as if the one or more computer networks 100 are instead an internal computer network of the company or other organization, and with such a copy of the CDD system optionally not being available to other users external to the company or other organizations. The online version of the CDD system 140 and/or local copy version of the CDD system 140 may in some embodiments and situations operate in a fee-based manner, such that the one or more users provide various fees to use various operations of the CDD system, such as to perform interactions to generate decision modules and corresponding automated control systems, and/or to deploy or implement such decision modules and corresponding automated control systems in various manners. In addition, the CDD system 140, each of its components (including component 142 and optional other components 117, such as one or more CDD Control Action Determination components and/or one or more CDD Coordinated Control Management components), each of the decision modules, and/or each of the automated control systems may include software instructions that execute on one or more computing systems (not shown) by one or more processors (not shown), such as to configure those processors and computing systems to operate as specialized machines with respect to performing their programmed functionality.
  • FIG. 2 is a network diagram illustrating an example environment in which a system for performing cooperative distributed control of target systems may be implemented, and in particular continues the examples discussed with respect to FIG. 1. In the example environment of FIG. 2, target system 1 160 is again illustrated, with the automated control system 122 now being deployed and implemented to use in actively controlling the target system 1 160. In the example of FIG. 2, the decision modules 124 are represented as individual decision modules 124 a, 124 b, etc., to 124 n, and may be executing locally to the target system 1 160 and/or in a remote manner over one or more intervening computer networks (not shown). In the illustrated example, each of the decision modules 124 includes a local copy of a CDD Control Action Determination component 144, such as with component 144 a supporting its local decision module 124 a, component 144 b supporting its local decision module 124 b, and component 144 n supporting its local decision module 124 n. Similarly, the actions of the various decision modules 124 are coordinated and synchronized in a peer-to-peer manner in the illustrated embodiment, with each of the decision modules 124 including a copy of a CDD Coordinated Control Management component 146 to perform such synchronization, with component 146 a supporting its local decision module 124 a, component 146 b supporting its local decision module 124 b, and component 146 n supporting its local decision module 124 n.
  • As the decision modules 124 and automated control system 122 execute, various interactions 175 between the decision modules 124 are performed, such as to share information about current models and other state of the decision modules to enable cooperation and coordination between various decision modules, such as for a particular decision module to operate in a partially synchronized consensus manner with respect to one or more other decision modules (and in some situations in a fully synchronized manner in which the consensus actions of all of the decision modules 124 converge). During operation of the decision modules 124 and automated control system 122, various state information 143 may be obtained by the automated control system 122 from the target system 160, such as initial state information and changing state information over time, and including outputs or other results in the target system 1 from control actions performed by the decision modules 124.
  • The target system 1 in this example includes various control elements 161 that the automated control system 122 may manipulate, and in this example each decision module 124 may have a separate group of one or more control elements 161 that it manipulates (such that decision module A 124 a performs interactions 169 a to perform control actions A 147 a on control elements A 161 a, decision module B 124 b performs interactions 169 b to perform control actions B 147 b on control elements B 161 b, and decision module N 124 n performs interactions 169 n to perform control actions N 147 n on control elements N 161 n). Such control actions affect the internal state 163 of other elements of the target system 1, including optionally to cause or influence one or more outputs 162. As operation of the target system 1 is ongoing, at least some of the internal state information 163 is provided to some or all of the decision modules to influence their ongoing control actions, with each of the decision modules 124 a-124 n possibly having a distinct set of state information 143 a-143 n, respectively, in this example.
  • As discussed in greater detail elsewhere, each decision module 124 may use such state information 143 and a local model 145 of the decision module for the target system to determine particular control actions 147 to next perform, such as for each of multiple time periods, although in other embodiments and situations, a particular automated control system may perform interactions with a particular target system for only one time period or only for some time periods. For example, the local CDD Control Action Determination component 144 for a decision module 124 may determine a near-optimal location solution for that decision module's local model 145, and with the local CDD Coordinated Control Management component 146 determining a synchronized consensus solution to reflect other of the decision modules 124, including to update the decision module's local model 145 based on such local and/or synchronized solutions that are determined. Thus, during execution of the automated control system 122, the automated control system performs various interactions with the target system 160, including to request state information, and to provide instructions to modify values of or otherwise manipulate control elements 161 of the target system 160. For example, for each of multiple time periods, decision module 124 a may perform one or more interactions 169 a with one or more control elements 161 a of the target system, while decision module 124 b may similarly perform one or more interactions 169 b with one or more separate control elements B 161 b, and decision module 124 n may perform one or more interactions 169 n with one or more control elements N 161 n of the target system 160. In other embodiments and situations, at least some control elements may not perform control actions during each time period.
  • While example target system 2 170 is not illustrated in FIG. 2, further details are illustrated for decision module 128 of automated control system 126 for reference purposes, although such a decision module 128 would not typically be implemented together with the decision modules 124 controlling target system 1. In particular, the deployed copy of automated control system 126 includes only the single executing decision module 128 in this example, although in other embodiments the automated control system 126 may include other components and functionality. In addition, since only a single decision module 128 is implemented for the automated control system 126, the decision module 128 includes a local CDD Control Action Determination component 244, but does not in the illustrated embodiment include any local CDD Coordinated Control Management component, since there are not other decision modules with which to synchronize and interact.
  • While not illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2, the distributed nature of operations of automated control systems such as those of 122 allow partially decoupled operations of the various decision modules, include to allow modifications to the group of decision modules 124 to be modified over time while the automated control system 122 is in use, such as to add new decision modules 124 and/or to remove existing decision modules 124. In a similar manner, changes may be made to particular decision modules 124 and/or 128, such as to change rules or other restrictions specific to a particular decision module and/or to change goals specific to a particular decision module over time, with a new corresponding model being generated and deployed within such a decision module, including in some embodiments and situations while the corresponding automated control system continues control operations of a corresponding target system. In addition, while each automated control system is described as controlling a single target system in the examples of FIGS. 1 and 2, in other embodiments and situations, other configurations may be used, such as for a single automated control system to control multiple target systems (e.g., multiple inter-related target systems, multiple target systems of the same type, etc.), and/or multiple automated control systems may operate to control a single target system, such as by each operating independently to control different portions of that target control system. It will be appreciated that other configurations may similarly be used in other embodiments and situations.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating example computing systems suitable for performing techniques for implementing automated control systems to control or otherwise manipulate at least some operations of specified physical systems or other target systems in configured manners. In particular, FIG. 3 illustrates a server computing system 300 suitable for providing at least some functionality of a CDD system, although in other embodiments multiple computing systems may be used for the execution (e.g., to have distinct computing systems executing the CDD Decision Module Construction component for initial configuration and setup before run-time control occurs, and one or more copies of the CDD Control Action Determination component 344 and/or the CDD Coordinated Control Managements component 346 for the actual run-time control). FIG. 3 also illustrates various client computer systems 350 that may be used by customers or other users of the CDD system 340, as well as one or more target systems (in this example, target system 1 360 and target system 2 370, which are accessible to the CDD system 340 over one or more computer networks 390).
  • The server computing system 300 has components in the illustrated embodiment that include one or more hardware CPU (“central processing unit”) computer processors 305, various I/O (“input/output”) hardware components 310, storage 320, and memory 330. The illustrated I/O components include a display 311, a network connection 312, a computer-readable media drive 313, and other I/O devices 315 (e.g., a keyboard, a mouse, speakers, etc.). In addition, the illustrated client computer systems 350 may each have components similar to those of server computing system 300, including one or more CPUs 351, I/O components 352, storage 354, and memory 357, although some details are not illustrated for the computing systems 350 for the sake of brevity. The target systems 360 and 370 may also each include one or more computing systems (not shown) having components that are similar to some or all of the components illustrated with respect to server computing system 300, but such computing systems and components are not illustrated in this example for the sake of brevity.
  • The CDD system 340 is executing in memory 330 and includes components 342-346, and in some embodiments the system and/or components each includes various software instructions that when executed program one or more of the CPU processors 305 to provide an embodiment of a CDD system as described elsewhere herein. The CDD system 340 may interact with computing systems 350 over the network 390 (e.g., via the Internet and/or the World Wide Web, via a private cellular network, etc.), as well as the target systems 360 and 370 in this example. In this example embodiment, the CDD system includes functionality related to generating and deploying decision modules in configured manners for customers or other users, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere herein. The other computing systems 350 may also be executing various software as part of interactions with the CDD system 340 and/or its components. For example, client computing systems 350 may be executing software in memory 357 to interact with CDD system 340 (e.g., as part of a Web browser, a specialized client-side application program, etc.), such as to interact with one or more interfaces (not shown) of the CDD system 340 to configure and deploy automated control systems (e.g., stored automated control systems 325 that were previously created by the CDD system 340) or other decision modules 329, as well as to perform various other types of actions, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere. Various information related to the functionality of the CDD system 340 may be stored in storage 320, such as information 321 related to users of the CDD system (e.g., account information), and information 323 related to one or more target systems. It will be appreciated that computing systems 300 and 350 and target systems 360 and 370 are merely illustrative and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. The computing systems may instead each include multiple interacting computing systems or devices, and the computing systems/nodes may be connected to other devices that are not illustrated, including through one or more networks such as the Internet, via the Web, or via private networks (e.g., mobile communication networks, etc.). More generally, a computing node or other computing system or device may comprise any combination of hardware that may interact and perform the described types of functionality, including without limitation desktop or other computers, database servers, network storage devices and other network devices, PDAs, cell phones, wireless phones, pagers, electronic organizers, Internet appliances, television-based systems (e.g., using set-top boxes and/or personal/digital video recorders), and various other consumer products that include appropriate communication capabilities. In addition, the functionality provided by the illustrated CDD system 340 and its components may in some embodiments be distributed in additional components. Similarly, in some embodiments some of the functionality of the CDD system 340 and/or CDD components 342-346 may not be provided and/or other additional functionality may be available.
  • It will also be appreciated that, while various items are illustrated as being stored in memory or on storage while being used, these items or portions of them may be transferred between memory and other storage devices for purposes of memory management and data integrity. Alternatively, in other embodiments some or all of the software modules and/or systems may execute in memory on another device and communicate with the illustrated computing systems via inter-computer communication. Thus, in some embodiments, some or all of the described techniques may be performed by hardware means that include one or more processors and/or memory and/or storage when configured by one or more software programs (e.g., by the CDD system 340 and/or the CDD components 342-346) and/or data structures, such as by execution of software instructions of the one or more software programs and/or by storage of such software instructions and/or data structures. Furthermore, in some embodiments, some or all of the systems and/or components may be implemented or provided in other manners, such as by using means that are implemented at least partially or completely in firmware and/or hardware, including, but not limited to, one or more application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), standard integrated circuits, controllers (e.g., by executing appropriate instructions, and including microcontrollers and/or embedded controllers), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs), etc. Some or all of the components, systems and data structures may also be stored (e.g., as software instructions or structured data) on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, such as a hard disk or flash drive or other non-volatile storage device, volatile or non-volatile memory (e.g., RAM), a network storage device, or a portable media article to be read by an appropriate drive (e.g., a DVD disk, a CD disk, an optical disk, etc.) or via an appropriate connection. The systems, components and data structures may also in some embodiments be transmitted as generated data signals (e.g., as part of a carrier wave or other analog or digital propagated signal) on a variety of computer-readable transmission mediums, including wireless-based and wired/cable-based mediums, and may take a variety of forms (e.g., as part of a single or multiplexed analog signal, or as multiple discrete digital packets or frames). Such computer program products may also take other forms in other embodiments. Accordingly, the present invention may be practiced with other computer system configurations.
  • FIG. 4 is a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a Collaborative Distributed Decision (CDD) system routine 400. The routine may, for example, be provided by execution of the CDD system 340 of FIG. 3 and/or the CDD system 140 of FIG. 1, such as to provide functionality to construct and implement automated control systems for specified target systems.
  • The illustrated embodiment of the routine begins at block 410, where information or instructions are received. If it is determined in block 420 that the information or instructions of block 410 include an indication to create or revise one or more decision modules for use as part of an automated control system for a particular target system, the routine continues to block 425 to initiate execution of a Decision Module Construction component, and in block 430 obtains and stores one or more resulting decision modules for the target system that are created in block 425. One example of a routine for such a Decision Module Construction component is discussed in greater detail with respect to FIGS. 5A-5B.
  • After block 430, or if it is instead determined in block 420 that the information or instructions received in block 410 are not to create or revise one or more decision modules, the routine continues to block 440 to determine whether the information or instructions received in block 410 indicate to deploy one or more created decision modules to control a specified target system, such as for one or more decision modules that are part of an automated control system for that target system. The one or more decision modules to deploy may have been created immediately prior with respect to block 425, such that the deployment occurs in a manner that is substantially simultaneous with the creation, or in other situations may include one or more decision modules that were created at a previous time and stored for later use. If it is determined to deploy one or more such decision modules for such a target system, the routine continues to block 450 to initiate the execution of those one or more decision modules for that target system, such as on one or more computing systems local to an environment of the target system, or instead on one or more remote computing systems that communicate with the target system over one or more intermediary computer networks (e.g., one or more computing systems under control of a provider of the CDD system).
  • After block 450, the routine continues to block 460 to determine whether to perform distributed management of multiple decision modules being deployed in a manner external to those decision modules, such as via one or more centralized Coordinated Control Management components. If so, the routine continues to block 465 to initiate execution of one or more such centralized CDD Coordinated Control Management components for use with those decision modules. After block 465, or if it is instead determined in block 460 to not perform such distributed management in an external manner (e.g., if only one decision module is executed, if multiple decision modules are executed but coordinate their operations in a distributed peer-to-peer manner, etc.), the routine continues to block 470 to optionally obtain and store information about the operations of the one or more decision modules and/or resulting activities that occur in the target system, such as for later analysis and/or reporting.
  • If it is instead determined in block 440 that the information or instructions received in block 410 are not to deploy one or more decision modules, the routine continues instead to block 485 to perform one or more other indicated operations if appropriate. For example, such other authorized operations may include obtaining results information about the operation of a target system in other manners (e.g., by monitoring outputs or other state information for the target system), analyzing results of operations of decision modules and/or activities of corresponding target systems, generating reports or otherwise providing information to users regarding such operations and/or activities, etc. In addition, in some embodiments the analysis of activities of a particular target system over time may allow patterns to be identified in operation of the target system, such as to allow a model of that target system to be modified accordingly (whether manually or in an automated learning manner) to reflect those patterns and to respond based on them. In addition, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere, distributed operation of multiple decision modules for an automated control system in a partially decoupled manner allows various changes to be made while the automated control system is in operation, such as to add one or more new decision modules, to remove one or more existing decision modules, to modify the operation of a particular decision module (e.g., by changing rules or other information describing the target system that is part of a model for the decision module), etc. In addition, the partially decoupled nature of multiple such decision modules in an automated control system allows one or more such decision modules to operate individually at times, such as if network communication issues or other problems prevent communication between multiple decision modules that would otherwise allow their individualized control actions to be coordinated—in such situations, some or all such decision modules may continue to operate in an individualized manner, such as to provide useful ongoing control operations for a target system even if optimal or near-optimal solutions cannot be identified from coordination and synchronization between a group of multiple decision modules that collectively provide the automated control system for the target system.
  • After blocks 470 or 485, the routine continues to block 495 to determine whether to continue, such as until an explicit indication to terminate is received. If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 410, and otherwise continues to block 499 and ends.
  • FIGS. 5A-5B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Decision Module Construction routine 500. The routine may, for example, be provided by execution of the component 342 of FIG. 3 and/or the component 142 of FIG. 1, such as to provide functionality to allow users to provide information describing a target system of interest, and to perform corresponding automated operations to construct one or more decision modules to use to control the target system in specified manners. While the illustrated embodiment of the routine interacts with users in particular manners, such as via a displayed GUI (graphical user interface), it will be appreciated that other embodiments of the routine may interact with users in other manners, such as via a defined API (application programming interface) that an executing program invokes on behalf of a user. In some embodiments, the routine may further be implemented as part of an integrated development environment or other software tool that is available for one or more users to use, such as by implementing an online interface that is available to a variety of remote users over a public network such as the Internet, while in other embodiments a copy of the CDD system and/or particular CDD components may be used to support a single organization or other group of one or more users, such as by being executed on computing systems under the control of the organization or group. In addition, the CDD Decision Module Construction component may in some embodiments and situations be separated into multiple sub-components, such as a rules editor component that users interact with to specify rules and other description information for a target system, and a rules compiler engine that processes the user-specified rules and other information to create one or more corresponding decision modules.
  • The illustrated embodiment of the routine 500 begins at block 510, where the routine provides or updates a displayed user interface to one or more users, such as via a request received at an online version of component that is implementing the routine, or instead based on the routine being executed by one or more such users on computing systems that they control. While various operations are shown in the illustrated embodiment of the routine as occurring in a serial manner for the purpose of illustration, it will be appreciated that user interactions with such a user interface may occur in an iterative manner and/or over multiple periods of time and/or user sessions, including to update a user interface previously displayed to a user in various manners (e.g., to reflect a user action, to reflect user feedback generated by operation of the routine or from another component, etc.), as discussed further below.
  • After block 510, the routine continues to block 520 to receive information from one or more such users describing a target system to be controlled, including information about a plurality of elements of the target system that include one or more manipulatable control elements and optionally one or more outputs that the control elements affect, information about rules that specify restrictions involving the elements, information about state information that will be available during controlling of the system (e.g., values of particular elements or other state variables), and one or more goals to achieve during the controlling of the target system. It will be appreciated that such information may be obtained over a period of time from one or more users, including in some embodiments for a first group of one or more users to supply some information related to a target system and for one or more other second groups of users to independently provide other information about the target system, such as to reflect different areas of expertise of the different users and/or different parts of the target system.
  • After block 520, the routine continues to block 525 to identify any errors that have been received in the user input, and to prompt the user(s) to correct those errors, such as by updating the display in a corresponding manner as discussed with respect to block 510. While the identification of such errors is illustrated as occurring after the receiving of the information in block 520, it will be appreciated that some or all such errors may instead be identified as the users are inputting information into the user interface, such as to identify syntax errors in rules or other information that the users specify. After block 525, the illustrated embodiment of the routine continues to block 530 to optionally decompose the information about the target system into multiple subsets that each correspond to a portion of the target system, such as with each subset having one or more different control elements that are manipulatable by the automated control system being created by the routine, and optionally have overlapping or completely distinct goals and/or sets of rules and other information describing the respective portions of the target system. As discussed in greater detail elsewhere, such decomposition, if performed, may in some situations be performed manually by the users indicating different subgroups of information that they enter, and/or in an automated manner by the routine based on an analysis of the information that has been specified (e.g., based on the size of rules and other descriptive information supplied for a target system, based on inter-relationships between different rules or goals or other information, etc.). In other embodiments, no such decomposition may be performed.
  • After block 530, the routine continues to block 535 to, for each subset of target system description information (or for all the received information if no such subsets are identified), convert that subset (or all the information) into a set of constraints that encapsulate the restrictions, goals, and other specified information for that subset (or for all the information). In block 540, the routine then identifies any errors that occur from the converting process, and if any are identified, may prompt the user to correct those errors, such as in a manner similar to that described with respect to blocks 525 and 510. While not illustrated in this example, the routine may in some situations in blocks 525 and/or 540 return to block 510 when such errors are identified, to display corresponding feedback to the user(s) and to allow the user(s) to make corrections and re-perform following operations such as those of blocks 520-540. The errors identified in the converting process in block 540 may include, for example, errors related to inconsistent restrictions, such as if the restrictions as a group are impossible to satisfy.
  • After block 540, the routine continues to block 545 to, for each set of constraints (or a single constraint set if no subsets were identified in block 530), apply one or more validation rules to the set of constraints to test overall effectiveness of the corresponding information that the constraints represent, and to prompt the one or more users to correct any errors that are identified in a manner similar to that with respect to blocks 525, 540 and 510. Such validation rules may test one or more of controllability, observability, stability, and goal completeness, as well as any user-added validation rules, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere. In block 550, the routine then converts each validated set of constraints to a set of coupled differential equations that model at least a portion of the target system to which the underlying information corresponds.
  • After block 550, the routine continues to block 553 to perform activities related to training a model for each set of coupled differential equations, including to determine one or more of a size of a training time window to use, size of multiple training time slices within the time window, and/or a type of training time slice within the time window. In some embodiments and situations, the determination of one or more such sizes or types of information is performed by using default or pre-specified information, while in other embodiments and situations the users may specify such information, or an automated determination of such information may be performed in one or more manners (e.g., by testing different sizes and evaluating results to find sizes with the best performance). Different types of time slices may include, for example, successions of time slices that overlap or do not overlap, such that the training for a second time slice may be dependent only on results of a first time slice (if they do not overlap) or instead may be based at least in part on updating information already determined for at least some of the first time slice (if they do overlap in part or in whole). After block 553, the routine continues to block 555 to, for each set of coupled differential equations representing a model, train the model for that set of coupled differential equations using partial initial state information for the target system, including to estimate values of variable that are not known and/or directly observable for the target system by simulating effects of performing control actions over the time window, such as for successive time slices throughout the time window, and to test the simulated performance of the trained model. Additional details related to training and testing are included elsewhere herein.
  • After block 555, the routine continues to block 560 to determine whether the training and testing was successful, and if not returns to block 510 to display corresponding feedback information to the users to allow them to correct errors that caused the lack of success. If it is instead determined in block 560 that the testing and training were successful, however, the routine continues instead to block 570 to generate an executable decision module for each trained and tested model that includes that model, as well as a local CCD Control Action Determination component that the decision module will use when executed to determine optimal or near-optimal control actions to perform for the target system based on the information included in the model, and in light of the one or more goals for that decision module. The generated executable decision module may in some embodiments and situations further include a local CCD Coordinated Control Management component to coordinate control actions of multiple decision modules that collectively will provide an automated control system for the target system, such as by synchronizing respective models of the various decision modules over time. After block 570, the routine continues to block 580 to provide the generated executable decision modules for use, including to optionally store them for later execution and/or deployment.
  • After block 580, the routine continues to block 595 to determine whether to continue, such as until an explicit indication to terminate is received. If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 510, and otherwise continues to block 599 and ends.
  • FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a routine 600 corresponding to a generic representation of a decision module that is being executed. The routine may, for example, be provided by execution of a decision module 329 or as part of an automated control system 325 of FIG. 3 and/or a decision module 124 or 128 of FIG. 1 or 2, such as to provide functionality for controlling at least a portion of a target system in a manner specific to information and a model encoded for the decision module, including to reflect one or more goals to be achieved by the decision module during its controlling activities. As discussed in greater detail elsewhere, in some embodiments and situations, multiple decision modules may collectively and cooperatively act to control a particular target system, such as with each decision module controlling one or more distinct control elements for the target system or otherwise representing or interacting with a portion of the target system, while in other embodiments and situations a single decision module may act alone to control a target system. The routine 600 further reflects actions performed by a particular example decision module when it is deployed in controlling a portion of a target system, although execution of at least portions of a decision module may occur at other times, such as initially to train a model for the decision module before the decision module is deployed, as discussed in greater detail with respect to the CDD Decision Module Construction routine 500 of FIGS. 5A-5B.
  • The illustrated embodiment of the routine 600 begins at block 610, where an initial model for the decision module is determined that describes at least a portion of a target system to be controlled, one or more goals for the decision module to attempt to achieve related to control of the target system, and optionally initial state information for the target system. The routine continues to block 615 to perform one or more actions to train the initial model if needed, as discussed in greater detail with respect to blocks 553 and 555 of FIGS. 5A-5B—in some embodiments and situations, such training for block 615 is performed only if initial training is not done by the routine 500 of FIGS. 5A-5B, while in other embodiments and situations the training of block 615 is performed to capture information about a current state of the target system at a time that the decision module begins to execute (e.g., if not immediately deployed after initial creation and training) and/or to re-train the model at times as discussed in greater detail with respect to routine 700 of FIGS. 7A-7B as initiated by block 630.
  • After block 615, the routine continues to block 617 to determine a time period to use for performing each control action decision for the decision module, such as to reflect a rate at which control element modifications in the target system are needed and/or to reflect a rate at which new incoming state information is received that may alter future manipulations of the control elements. The routine then continues to block 620 to start the next time period, beginning with a first time period moving forward from the startup of the execution of the decision module. Blocks 620-680 are then performed in a loop for each such time period going forward until execution of the decision module is suspended or terminated, although in other embodiments a particular decision module may execute for only a single time period each time that it is executed.
  • In block 625, the routine optionally obtains state information for the time period, such as current state information that has been received for the target system or one or more related external sources since the last time period began, and/or by actively retrieving current values of one or more elements of the target system or corresponding variables as needed. In block 630, the routine then initiates execution of a local CCD Control Action Determination component of the decision module, with one example of such a routine discussed in greater detail with respect to routine 700 of FIGS. 7A-7B. In block 635, the results of the execution of the component in block 630 are received, including to either obtain an updated model for the decision module with a local solution for the current time period and decision module that includes one or more proposed control action determinations that the decision module may perform for the current time period, or to receive an indication that no local solution was found for the decision module in the allowed time for the execution of the component in block 630. It is then determined in block 640 whether a solution was found, and if so continues to block 642 to store the updated model for the decision module, and otherwise continues to block 643 to use the prior model for the decision module to determine one or more control action determinations that are proposed for the current time period based on a previous model (e.g., that does not reflect recent changes in state information and/or recent changes in activities of other decision modules, if any), as discussed in greater detail with respect to routine 700 of FIGS. 7A-7B.
  • After blocks 642 or 643, the routine continues to block 644 to determine if other decision modules are collectively controlling portions of the current target system, such as part of the same automated control system as the local decision module, and if so continues to block 645. Otherwise, the routine selects the local proposed control actions of the decision module as a final determined control action to perform, and continues to block 675 to implement those control actions for the current time period.
  • If there are other operating decision modules, the routine in block 645 determines if the local decision module includes a local copy of a CDD Coordinated Control Management (CCM) component for use in synchronizing the proposed control action determinations for the decision module's local solutions with activities of other decision modules that are collectively controlling the same target system. If so, the routine continues to block 647 to provide the one or more proposed control action determinations of the decision module and the corresponding current local model for the decision module to the local CDD CCM component, and otherwise continues to block 649 to provide the one or more proposed control action determinations for the decision module and the corresponding local model of the decision module to one or more centralized CDD CCM components.
  • After blocks 647 or 649, the routine continues to block 655 to obtain results of the actions of the CDD CCM component(s) in blocks 647 or 649, including to either obtain a further updated model resulting from synchronization of the local model for the current decision module with information from one or more other decision modules, such that the further updated model indicates one or more final control action determinations to perform for the time period for the current decision module, or an indication that no such synchronization was completed in the allowed time. The routine continues to block 660 to determine whether the synchronization was completed, and if so continues to block 665 to store the further updated model from the synchronization, and otherwise continues to block 670 to use the prior proposed control action determinations locally to the decision module as the final control action determinations for the time period.
  • After blocks 665 or 670, the routine continues to block 675 to implement the one or more final determined control actions for the decision module in the target system, such as by interacting with one or more effectuators in the target system that modify values or otherwise manipulate one or more control elements of the target system, or by otherwise providing input to the target system to cause such modifications or other manipulations to occur. In block 680, the routine optionally obtains information about the results in the target system of the control actions performed, and stores and/or provides information to the CDD system about such obtained results and/or about the activities of the decision module for the current time period.
  • After block 680, the routine continues to block 695 to determine whether to continue, such as until an indication to terminate or suspend is received (e.g., to reflect an end to current operation of the target system or an end of use of the decision module to control at least a portion of the target system). If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 620 to start the next time period, and otherwise continues to block 699 and ends.
  • FIGS. 7A-7B are a flow diagram of a example embodiment of a CDD Control Action Determination routine 700. The routine may, for example, be provided by execution of the component 344 of FIG. 3 and/or components 144 a-n or 244 of FIG. 2, such as to determine control actions for a decision module to propose and/or implement for a target system during a particular time period, including in some embodiments to perform an optimization to determine near-optimal actions (e.g., within a threshold of an optimal solution) to perform with respect to one or more goals if possible. While the illustrated embodiment of the routine is performed in a manner local to a particular decision module, such that some or all decision modules may each implement a local version of such a routine, in other embodiments the routine may be implemented in a centralized manner by one or more components with which one or more decision modules interact over one or more networks, such as with a particular decision module indicated to be used at a particular time rather than acting on behalf of the local decision module.
  • The illustrated embodiment of the routine 700 begins at block 703, where information or a request is received. The routine continues to block 705 to determine a type of the information or request, and to proceed accordingly. In particular, if a request is received in block 703 to attempt to determine a solution for a current time period given a current model of the local decision module, the routine continues to block 710 to begin to perform such activities, as discussed in greater detail with respect to block 710-790. If it is instead determined in block 705 that a request to relax one or more rules or other restrictions for the current model of the local decision module is received, such as discussed in greater detail with respect to blocks 760 and 765, the routine continues to block 765. If it is determined in block 705 that a request is received to repair one or more rules or other restrictions for the current model of the local decision module, such as discussed in greater detail with respect to blocks 775 and 780, the routine continues to block 780 to obtain user input to use during the rule repair process (e.g., to interact with a CDD Decision Module Construction component, or to instead interact with one or more users in another manner), such as to allow the current model for the local decision module to later be updated and replaced based on further resulting user actions, or if operation of the target system can be suspended, to optionally wait to further perform the routine 700 until such an updated model is received. If it is instead determined in block 705 that the information or request is of another type, the routine continues instead to block 708 to perform one or more other indicated operations as appropriate, and to then proceed to block 799. Such other indicated operations may include, for example, receiving information about current models and/or control actions proposed or performed by one or more other decision modules that are collectively controlling a target system with the local decision module (such as for use in synchronizing the model of the local decision module with such other decision modules by generating a consensus or converged shared model, as discussed in greater detail with respect to routine 800 of FIGS. 8A-8B), to receive updates to a model or underlying information for the model for use in ongoing operation of the routine 700 (e.g., from a CDD Decision Module Construction component, such as results from interactions performed in block 780), to receive current state information for the target system, such as for use as discussed in routine 600 of FIGS. 6A-6B, etc.
  • If it determined in block 705 that a request for a solution was received in block 703 for a current time period and based on a current model of the local decision module, the routine continues to block 710 to receive a current set of coupled differential equations that represent the current model for the local decision module of at least a portion of the target system, optionally along with additional state information for the target system for the current time. The routine then continues to block 715 to determine whether to train or re-train the model, such as if the routine is called for a first time upon initial execution of a corresponding decision module or if error measurements from ongoing operations indicate a need for re-training, as discussed in greater detail with respect to blocks 755, 770 and 730. If it is determined to train or re-train the model, the routine continues to block 720 to determine one or more of the size of a training time window, size of training time slices within the time window, and/or type of training time slices within the training time window, such as in a manner similar to that previously discussed with respect to block 553 of routine 500 of FIGS. 5A-5B. After block 720, the routine continues to block 725 to use partial initial state information for the target system to train the model, including to estimate values of state variables for the target system that are not known and/or directly observable, by simulating effects of performing control actions over the time window for each of the time slices, as discussed in greater detail with respect to block 555 of routine 500 of FIGS. 5A-5B.
  • After block 725, or if it is instead determined in block 715 not to train or re-train the model, the routine continues to block 730 to perform a piecewise linear analysis to attempt to determine a solution for the current model and any additional state information that was obtained in block 710, with the solution (if determined) including one or more proposed control action determinations for the local decision module to take for a current time period, as well as in some embodiments to use one or more model error gauges to make one or more error measurements with respect to the current model, as discussed in greater detail elsewhere. The routine then continues to block 735 to determine if the operations in block 730 determined a solution within a amount of time allowed for the operation of block 730 (e.g., a defined subset or fraction of the current time period), and if so continues to block 740 to update the current set of coupled differential equations and the resulting current model for the local decision module to reflect the solution, with the resulting updated information provided as an output of the routine 700.
  • If it is instead determined in block 735 that the operations in block 730 did not determine a solution, the routine continues to block 745 to determine if additional time is available within the current time period for further attempts to determine a solution, and if not continues to block 790 to provide output of the routine 700 indicating that no solution was determined for the current time period.
  • If additional time is available within the current time period, however, the routine continues to perform blocks 755-780 to perform one or more further attempts to identify the solution—it will be appreciated that one or more of the operations of blocks 755-780 may be repeatedly performed multiple times for a given time period if sufficient time is available to continue further solution determination attempts. In particular, the routine continues to block 755 if additional time is determined to be available in block 745, where it determines whether the measurements from one or more gauges indicate model error measurements that are over one or more thresholds indicating modifications to the model are needed, such as based on the model error measurements from the gauges discussed with respect to block 730. If not, the routine continues to block 760 to determine whether there are one or more rules or other restrictions in the current model that are available to be relaxed for the current time period (that have not previously attempted to be relaxed during the time period, if this is not the first pass through this portion of the routing for the current time period), and if so continues to block 765 to relax one or more such rules or other restrictions and to return to block 730 to re-attempt the piecewise linear analysis with the revised model based on those relaxed rules or other restrictions.
  • If it is instead determined in block 755 that the model error measurements from one or more of the gauges are sufficient to satisfy one or more corresponding thresholds, the routine continues instead to block 770 to determine whether to re-train the model based on one or more of the gauges indicating sufficient errors to do so, such as based on accumulated errors over one or more time periods of updates to the model. If so, the routine returns to block 720 to perform such re-training in blocks 720 and 725, and then continues to block 730 to re-attempt the piecewise linear analysis with the resulting re-trained model.
  • If it is instead determined in block 770 not to re-train the model (or if the model was re-trained already for the current time period and the resulting re-attempt in block 730 again failed to find a solution), the routine continues to block 775 to determine whether the model error measurements from one or more of the gauges indicate a subset of one or more rules or other restrictions in the model that potentially have errors that need to be repaired. If so, the routine continues to block 780 to provide information to one or more users via the CDD Decision Module Construction component, to allow the users to revise the rules or other restrictions as appropriate, although in other embodiments some or all such rule repair activities may instead be attempted or performed in an automated manner. After block 780, or if it is instead determined in block 775 not to repair any rules, the routine continues to block 790 to provide an indication that no solution was determined for the current time period. After blocks 740, 708, or 790, the routine continues to block 799 and ends. It will be appreciated that if the routine 700 was instead implemented as a centralized routine that supports one or more decision modules remote from the executing component for the routine, the routine 700 may instead return to block 703 to await further information or requests.
  • FIGS. 8A-8B are a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a CDD Coordinated Control Management routine 800. The routine may, for example, be provided by execution of the component 346 of FIG. 3 and/or the components 146 a-n of FIG. 2, such as to attempt to synchronize current models and their proposed control actions between multiple decision modules that are collectively controlling a target system. In the illustrated embodiment of the routine, the synchronization is performed in a pairwise manner between a particular local decision module's local current model and an intermediate shared model for that decision module that is based on information about the current state of one or more other decision modules, by using a Pareto game technique to determine a Pareto equilibrium if possible that is represented in a consensus shared model, although in other embodiments other types of synchronization methods may be used. In addition, in the illustrated embodiment, the routine 800 is performed in a local manner for a particular local decision module, such as by being included within that local decision module, although in other embodiments the routine 800 may be implemented in a centralized manner to support one or more decision modules that are remote from a computing system implementing the component for the routine and that communicate with those decision modules over one or more computer networks, such as with a particular decision module indicated to be used at a particular time rather than acting on behalf of the local decision module.
  • The illustrated embodiment of the routine 800 begins at block 805, where it waits to receive information or another indication. The routine continues to block 810 to determine if a consensus model or other updated information for another decision module has been received, such as from a copy of the routine 800 executing for that other decision module, and if so continues to block 815 to use the received information to update local intermediate shared model information for use with the local decision module on whose behalf the current copy of the routine 800 is executing, as discussed in greater detail with respect to block 830. If it is instead determined in block 810 that the information or request received in block 805 is not information related to one or more other decision modules, or after block 815, the routine continues to block 820 to determine whether to currently perform a synchronization for the current local model of the local decision module by using information about an intermediate shared model of the local decision module that includes information for one or more other decision modules, such as to do such synchronization each time that an update to the local decision module's model is received (e.g., based on operation of the routine 700 for a copy of the CDD Control Action Determination component local to that decision module) in block 805 and/or each time that information to update the local decision module's intermediate shared model is received in block 805 and used in block 815, or instead as explicitly indicated in block 805—if the synchronization is to currently be performed, the routine continues to block 825 and begins to perform blocks 820-880 related to such synchronization activities. Otherwise, the routine continues to block 885 to perform one or more other indicated operations as appropriate, such as to receive requests from the CDD system or other requestor for current information about operation of the routine 800 and/or to provide corresponding information to one or more entities (e.g., to reflect prior requests), etc.
  • If it is determined in block 820 that synchronization is to be currently performed, such as based on updated model-related information that is received in block 805, the routine continues to block 825 to obtain a current local model for the local decision module to use in the synchronizing, with the model including one or more proposed control actions to perform for a current time period based on a local solution for the local decision module. The routine then continues to block 830 to retrieve information for an intermediate shared model of the local decision module that represents information for one or more other decision modules (e.g., all other decision modules) that are collectively participating in controlling the target system, with that intermediate shared model similarly representing one or more other proposed control actions resulting from local solutions of those one or more other decision modules, optionally after partial or complete synchronization has been performed for those one or more other decision modules between themselves.
  • The routine then continues to block 835 to attempt to determine a consensus shared model that synchronizes the current model of the local decision module and the intermediate shared model by simultaneously providing solutions to both the local decision module's current model and the intermediate shared model. In some embodiments, the operations of block 835 are performed in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to blocks 710-730 of routine 700 of FIG. 7A-7B, such as if the local model and the intermediate shared model are combined to create a combination model for whom one or more solutions are to be identified. As discussed in greater detail elsewhere, in some embodiments, the local current model and intermediate shared model may each be represented by a Hamiltonian function to enable a straightforward creation of such a combined model in an additive manner for the respective Hamiltonian functions, with the operations of routines 600 and/or 700 of FIGS. 6A-6B and 7A-7B, respectively, similarly representing the models that they update and otherwise manipulate using such Hamiltonian functions.
  • After block 835, the routine continues to block 840 to determine whether the operations of block 835 succeeded in an allowed amount of time, such as a fraction or other portion of the current time period for which the synchronization is attempted to be performed, and if so the routine continues to block 845 to update both the local model and the intermediate shared model of the local decision module to reflect the consensus shared model. As earlier noted, if sufficient time is allowed for each decision module to repeatedly determine a consensus shared model with changing intermediate shared models representing one or more other decision modules of a collective group, the decision modules of the collective group may eventually converge on a single converged shared model, although in other embodiments and situations there may not be sufficient time for such convergence to occur, or other issues may prevent such convergence. After block 845, the routine continues to block 850 to optionally notify other decision modules of the consensus shared model determined for the local decision module (and/or of a converged shared model, if the operations of 835 were a last step in creating such a converged shared model), such as if each of the notified decision modules is implementing its own local version of the routine 800 and the provided information will be used as part of an intermediate shared model of those other decision modules that includes information from the current local decision module's newly constructed consensus shared model.
  • If it is instead determined in block 840 that a synchronization did not occur in the allowed time, the routine continues to perform blocks 860-875 to re-attempt the synchronization with one or more modifications, sometimes repeatedly if sufficient time is available, and in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to blocks 745-780 of routine 700 of FIGS. 7A-7B. In the illustrated example, the routine determines in block 860 if additional time is available for one or more such re-attempts at synchronization, and if not the routine continues to block 880 to provide an indication that no synchronization was performed within the allowed time. Otherwise, the routine continues to block 870 to take one or more actions to perform one or more of relaxing rules or other restrictions, repairing rules or other restrictions, and/or re-training a model, with respect to one or both of the current model of the local decision module and/or one or more other decision modules whose information is represented in the intermediate shared model of the local decision module. If it is determined in block 870 to proceed in this manner, the routine continues to block 875 to perform corresponding actions, sometimes one at a time in a manner similar to that discussed with respect to routine 700, including to cause resulting updates to the current model of the local decision module and/or to the local intermediate shared model of the local decision module, after which the routine returns to block 835 to re-attempt to synchronize the local model and the intermediate shared model of the local decision module.
  • If it is instead determined in block 870 that no further actions are to be performed with respect to relaxation, repair and/or re-training, the routine continues instead to block 880. After blocks 850, 880 or 885, the routine continues to block 895 to determine whether to continue, such as until an explicit indication to terminate or suspend operation of the routine 800 is received, such as to reflect an end to operation of the target system and/or an end to use of the local decision module and/or a collective group of multiple decision modules to control the target system. If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 805, and otherwise continues to block 899 and ends.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a flow diagram of an example embodiment of a routine 900 performed for a representative generic target system, with respect to interactions between the target system and one or more decision modules that are controlling at least a portion of the target system. The routine may, for example, be provided by execution of a target system 360 and/or 370 of FIG. 3, and/or a target system 160 and/or 170 of FIGS. 1 and 2, such as to implement operations specific to the target system. It will be appreciated that the illustrated embodiment of the routine focuses on interactions of the target system with the one or more decision modules, and that many or all such target systems will perform many other operations in a manner specific to those target systems that are not illustrated here for the purpose of brevity.
  • The routine begins at block 910, where it optionally provides initial state information for the target system to a CDD system for use in an automated control system of the CDD system for the target system, such as in response to a request from the CDD system or its automated control system for the target system, or instead based on configuration specific to the target system (e.g., to be performed upon startup of the target system). After block 910, the routine continues to block 920 to receive one or more inputs from a collective group of one or more decision modules that implement the automated control system for the target system, including one or more modified values for or other manipulations of one or more control elements of a plurality of elements of the target system that are performed by one or more such decision modules of the automated control system. As discussed in greater detail elsewhere, the blocks 920, 930, 940 may be repeatedly performed for each of multiple time periods, which may vary greatly in time depending on the target system (e.g., a microsecond, a millisecond, a hundredth of a second, a tenth of a second, a second, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, a minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, an hour, etc.).
  • After block 920, the routine continues to block 930 to perform one or more actions in the target system based on the inputs received, including to optionally produce one or more resulting outputs or other results within the target system based on the manipulations of the control elements. In block 940, the routine then optionally provides information about the outputs or other results within the target system and/or provides other current state information for the target system to the automated control system of the CDD system and/or to particular decision modules of the automated control system. The routine then continues to block 995 to determine whether to continue, such as until an explicit indication to terminate or suspend operation of the target system is received. If it is determined to continue, the routine returns to block 920 to begin a next set of control actions for a next time period, and otherwise continues to block 999 and ends. As discussed in greater detail elsewhere, state information that is provided to a particular decision module may include requests from external systems to the target system, which the automated control system and its decision modules may determine how to respond to in one or more manners.
  • The following sections describe a variety of specific, non-exclusive embodiments in which some or all of the described techniques may be implemented. It will be appreciated that particular details of particular embodiments may not be included in or true for all embodiments, and that the described embodiments may be implemented individually or in combination with any and all other combinations of other embodiments.
  • The following discusses several non-exclusive example embodiment, in which one or more specified embodiments of the Collaborative Distributed Decision system are each referred to as a Collaborative Distributed Inferencing (CDI) system or a Cooperative Distributed Inferencing Platform (CDIP), in which one or more specified embodiments of the Decision Module Construction component are each referred to as the “Rules Builder” or including or being performed by a “Rule Conversion Engine” (RCE) or a “CDL Compiler” or a “Rule(s) Entry Interface” (REI) or a “Rules and Goals UI”, in which one or more specified embodiments of the Control Action Determination component are each referred to as having “chattering” subcomponents or performing “chattering” functionality or including or being performed by a “Query Response Engine” (QRE) or an “Optimization Element” or via “Hamiltonian-Chattering Control”, in which one or more specified embodiments of the Coordinated Control Management component are each referred to as having or performing “mean field” information or functionality or including or being performed by a “Tellegen” agent or a “Pareto Multi-Criteria Optimization Engine” (PMOE) or a “Pareto element”, in which decision modules are referred to as “agents” or “peer agents” or “agent nodes” or “decision elements”, in which an automated control system may include a “cluster” of agents and in some cases is referred to as a “distributed architecture”, in which a target system is referred to as an “application domain”, in which a decision module's stored information about a target system includes an “Internal Heterogeneous Database” (IHDB) and/or a “Domain Rules Knowledge Base”, in which a decision module's consensus shared model is referred to as an “internal optimum” generated using mean field information, in which changes propagated from one decision module to others is referred to as a “delta”, etc.
  • CDI is built using a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) based distributed architecture that allows for partitioning the overall optimization problem into smaller sub-tasks or work-loads between peer agents. CDI Peer Agents are equally privileged participants in the application domain. They are configured to form a peer-to-peer network of nodes. This allows each agent in the network to solve the problem independently, using its own internal knowledge base. Each agent also internally engages in Pareto game playing to reach internal optimum before sharing changes with other agents. The agents then communicate the mean field changes with other agents in the network using a gossip protocol to synchronize their internal mean field approximation in an eventually consistent fashion. FIG. 10 illustrates a network diagram 1000 of a portion of a distributed architecture of an example CDI system.
  • CDI Cluster Setup
  • When system is initially configured certain agents are tagged as seed-nodes in the network. The seed agent nodes can be started in any order and it is not necessary to have all the seed agent nodes running. When initializing the CDI cluster at least one seed agent node is preferably running, otherwise the other CDI seed nodes may not become initialized and other CDI agent nodes might not join the cluster.
  • CDI Agent Cluster Registry
  • Each agent has a built-in registry of active CDI agent nodes in the cluster. This agent registry is started on all CDI agent nodes and is updated with every change in cluster membership including new agents joining the cluster, agents leaving the cluster, agent timeouts etc. Agents inform each other of active membership through a heartbeat mechanism. The registry is eventually consistent, i.e. changes may not immediately be visible at other nodes, but typically they will be fully replicated to all other nodes after a few seconds. The changed are propagated using the change deltas and are disseminated in a scalable way to other nodes with a gossip protocol.
  • CDI Cluster Agent Failure Detection
  • The CDI agent nodes in the cluster monitor each other by sending heartbeats to detect if a CDI agent node is unreachable from the rest of the CDI cluster. The heartbeat arrival times is interpreted by an implementation of the Phi Accrual Failure Detector (Hayashibara, Défago, Yared, & Katayama, 2004).
  • The suspicion level of failure is given by a value called phi. The basic idea of the phi failure detector is to express the value of phi on a scale that is dynamically adjusted to reflect current network conditions.
  • The value of phi is calculated as:

  • Phi=−log 10(1−F(timeSinceLastHeartbeat))
  • F is the cumulative distribution function of a normal distribution with mean and standard deviation estimated from historical heartbeat inter-arrival times.
  • CDI Cluster Agent Network Partition
  • Once a CDI agent node becomes network partitioned it will stop receiving mean field updates from the other agents in the Cluster. This however, should not prevent it from continuing to perform local optimizations based on its internal knowledge base, local mean field and sensor inputs that it will continue to receive.
  • The Rules Builder contains the following components:
      • Rules Entry Interface
      • Validator
      • CDL Compiler
      • Step Processor
      • Workflow Remote Control
      • Compiled Rules Engine Artifact
  • And interacts directly with the following components:
      • Master Agent.
  • The Master Agent is responsible for interaction with all Chattering components, including the following:
      • System Trainer & Bootstrapper
      • Runner
  • The System also utilizes a Persistent Store to access state and necessary models/data. FIG. 11 illustrates a network diagram 1100 of a portion of an example Rules Builder component.
  • Rules Entry Interface:
  • The Rules Entry Interface is responsible for receiving rules in a syntax familiar to a domain expert. The entry interface is a text entry tool where a domain expert would insert the rules, goal and system information (rules script(s)) to provide continuous control suggestions for a given problem. The entered rules script(s) would be composed in the CDI Domain-Specific Language (DSL). The CDI DSL facilitates functional translation of the entered rules script(s) into a problem definition which houses the control definitions (measurable variable with ranges allowed and any associated constraints on the control variable).
  • For example:
  • In the entry interface using the CDI DSL one would specify an upper and lower bound using the following syntax first defining a rule, with the parameters and the rule logic that evaluates against the system state.
      • rule id: “max production”, params: [“production”], {it <=15.0}
      • rule id: “min production”, params: [“production”], {it >=−50.0}
      • control var: “production”, min: “min production”, max: “max production”
  • In the entry interface using the CDI DSL one would specify the dynamics (variables that change with relation to other measurable variables and the definition of this change)
      • delta var: “inventory”, params: [“production”, “demand”], {p, d->p−d}
  • In the entry interface using the CDI DSL one would specify the goal (an objective i.e., to minimize or maximize a relationship between the control and controllable dynamics).
      • goal objective: “minimize”, params: [“inventory”, “production”], {inventory, production->((inventory−10)*(inventory−10))+(production*production)}
  • Finally, the entry interface is also responsible for facilitating a domain expert to provide certain settings that are used by the system as well as providing user workflow steps. The settings provided represent key: value terms used by the system and are available throughout by the Settings Provider encapsulated within the Rules Engine. An domain expert might write initial values of the following form:
      • settings <<[initialState: “20”, initialCoState: “0”, terminalCoState: “0”, numChatteringLevels: “9”, horizon: “3”, delta: “0.1”, iterations: “15”]
    CDL Compiler:
  • The CDL Compiler is responsible for the conversion of said rules into evaluatable constraints, system information and an optimization goal. The CDI Compiler translates the entered script(s) into a problem definition. A problem definition is composed of labeled rules. A rule is a tuple comprised of a unique name and a Term. A Term is an evaluatable function where the logic was authored as previously described above, the input to which contains a representation of the system state (StateMap).
  • Validator:
  • The Validator is responsible for the validation of converted constraints with regards to restrictions the optimization problem needs to satisfy as a prerequisite to its solution and/or reaching a solution quality threshold.
  • The converted constraints defined in the problem definition, along with the settings provider, is validated for controllability, observability, stability and goal completeness.
      • controllability—this check ensures that every control variable has a defined rule relating it to one or more dynamic state variables. The above example satisfies this check since our single control variable ‘production’ is used in the dynamic definition of ‘inventory’;
      • observability—checks the statemap against the defined rules in the script(s). An observability check does not impede the solution of a problem, however if failing, represents that our problem may not be well defined;
      • stability—this check ensures that our system will converge over time on a solution, which can be tested in the testing stage; and
      • goal completeness—ensures that every control variable appears in the goal.
    Compiled Rules Engine:
  • The conversion of rule scripts into mathematical expressions that can be yielded through an explicit contract to the chattering agent for use in solving the optimization goal, manifests in the compiled artifact that we label the Compiled Rules Engine
  • The Rules Engine defines and implements several interfaces for acquiring the values of these mathematical expressions, as later described with respect to “chattering” components. The Rules Engine is compiled as an artifact available to the Chattering component by the Compiler and made available for use in continuous processing. FIG. 12 illustrates a network diagram 1200 of example sub-components of an example Rules Builder component, in which compilation is dependent upon successful Validation of the observability, completeness, controllability, and workflow step validation. Any errors/warnings are returned to the domain expert for correction. Once corrections/improvements are complete, a new Compiled Rules Engine artifact is produced along with new commands delivered to the Step Processor.
  • Steps Processor and Remote Control:
  • Furthermore, the rules builder is also responsible for facilitating the workflow steps an individual domain expert would need to undertake before deploying such a system. These steps include:
      • training an optimization system using the converted rules, with bootstrapped sensor data;
      • testing the resulting control actuator inputs (the end results of the chattering optimization); and
      • persisting the trained model for use in the running of the overall system.
  • The workflow component allows for training and testing a system. This is integrated into the DSL in the form of a workflow step builder.
  • For example,
  • workflow {
       train.onComplete {
      persist: model, ‘/tmp/model’
          run.withSensorData(‘/tmp/simulatedData’).after(10 minutes)
       {
             persist: results, ‘/tmp/results’
             shutdown
          }
       }
    }
  • Here a domain expert instructs the default bootstrapper to be used in loading predefined sensor data, train the system on this data, persist the trained model output to the file ‘/tmp/model’, then once trained to begin running the system (as a single agent). The inputs are tested by analyzing the results from the run. The artifacts and model information are persisted to a persistent store. The Steps Processor facilitates the dispatch of interpreted workflow steps to the Remote Control for delegation to the Master Agent of a running system for processing.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a network diagram 1300 of interactions of portions of a Rules Builder component with an executing agent, including the Steps processor, the Remote Control and interactions with a running agent (the Step Processor handles interpretation of workflow steps, and the steps are delivered for dispatch by the Remote Control, which passes commands to the Master Agent; the Master Agent handles communication between a running system's controlled elements and the Remote Control, and examples of the Controlled Elements are the Trainer and Runner).
  • FIG. 14 illustrates a network diagram 1400 of interactions of portions of a Rules Builder component with chattering components, including a Running Agent that delivers messages and interacts with the chattering components to facilitate training and running the system (the Trainer persists its model once training has completed; The Trainer invokes a Bootstrapper for acquisition of training data; The Trainer utilizes the Chattering Library; The Trainer utilizes the Chattering Library; Chattering utilizes the compiled rules; Chattering persists its control suggestions; Bootstrapper persists training data).
  • With respect to the discussion below, FIG. 15 illustrates a diagram 1500 of a sliding window for use with chattering, and is referred to in the text for the example embodiment as “FIG. 1”, while FIG. 16 illustrates a diagram 1600 of using Lebesgue integration to approximate a control trajectory for chattering, and is referred to in the text for the example embodiment as “FIG. 2”.
  • The following discusses an example implementation that may be used for such chattering.
  • The following discusses further details regarding possible use with such chattering.
  • In the chattering algorithm, there are two timing parameters, the length of the window T, and the time slice Δ (where NΔ=T). For accuracy purposes, these two parameters should be sufficiently small, but for computational efficiency, these two parameters should be large. Therefore, we want to keep the parameters as large as possible, as long as the error is tolerable.
  • The incremental state equation (for δz) relies on the Jacobian matrix evaluated at the beginning of the time window. To characterize the error, we compare two linear systems, one that has a constant matrix, denoted A(t0), and the other has a time varying matrix, denoted A(t).
  • Consider both linear systems:

  • {dot over (x)}=A(t)x(t)  (1)

  • {dot over (y)}=A(t 0)y(t)  (2)
  • with the same initial conditions, x(t0)=y(t0).
  • The solution to (1) is of the form

  • x(t)=φ(t,t 0)x(t 0)
  • where φ(t, t0) satisfies several properties,

  • {dot over (φ)}(t,t 0)=A(t)φ(t,t 0)

  • φ(t 0 ,t 0)=1

  • φ−1(t,t 0)=φ(t 0 ,t).
  • The solution to (2) is of the form

  • y(t)=e A(t−t 0)x(t 0).
  • The error due to approximating A(t) with A(t0) is:

  • E(t)=φ(t,t 0)−e A(t−t 0 ).
  • Taking the derivative yields

  • {dot over (E)}(t)={dot over (φ)}(t,t 0)−A(t 0)e A(t−t 0 )
  • and replacing {dot over (φ)}(t, t0) with A(t)φ(t, t0) yields

  • {dot over (E)}(t)=A(t)φ(t,t 0)−A(t 0)e A(t−t 0 )
  • and substituting for φ(t, t0) yields
  • E . ( t ) = A ( t ) ( E ( t ) + A ( t - t 0 ) ) - A ( t 0 ) A ( t - t 0 ) = A ( t ) E ( t ) + ( A ( t ) - A ( t 0 ) ) A ( t - t 0 ) .
  • This provides the error as a function of (A(t)−A(t0)), and if the eigenvalues of A(t) for all t have real values less than zero, the error is linearly proportional to (A(t)—A(t0)).
  • The procedure to choose T is to ask the customer what size of error is tolerable.
  • The customer may say an error of 20% is tolerable, in which case the window length T can increase until reaching the associated threshold. The measure of the error is related to the difference,
  • i = 1 I F z α i t - i = 1 I F z α i t 0
  • The size of the time slice Δ is related to the magnitude of the largest eigenvalue of
  • F z .
  • Let |λ|=√{right arrow over (λreal 2imag 2)} and suppose |λ|i has the largest value. Then
  • Δ = 1 λ i .
  • The following discusses further details regarding an example of synchronizing a decision module's model and current information with that of information from one or more other decision modules.
  • In the multi-agent self-organizing architecture of CDI, all agents synchronize in some way. This is analogous in the worst case to the many-body problem, which Isaac Newton first formulated, and is unsolvable for three or more bodies. However, good approximations for systems of more than two bodies are computationally tractable. The approach in CDI is to solve a series of two-body problems that emulate a mean field aggregation, and update sequentially through a Pareto game.
  • Consider N agents, and each agent i, i=1, . . . , N, has its own optimization problem with criterion, state and control:

  • Minu i J i(x i ,u i)

  • s·t·{dot over (x)} i =f(x i ,u i)
  • The N problem in a single optimization problem is not algorithmically solvable, but it is possible to solve algorithmically a Pareto-optimization problem with two players (the Pareto game), and approximate the solution to the N player problem. The two-agent (agent 1 and agent 2) Pareto-optimization problem is

  • Minu 1 ,u 2 1 2 α1 J 1(x 1 ,u 1)+α2 J 2(x 2 ,u 2)

  • subject to

  • {dot over (x)} 1 =f(x 1 ,u 1)

  • x 2 =f(x 2 ,u 2)

  • α1(t)+α2(t)=1
  • The CDI approach is that each agent i plays a two-agent game with the CDI Mean Field agent composed of the criteria from all other agents except agent i. Instead of solving the two-agent optimization problem directly, we convert the formulation to a Hamiltonian problem (using Pontryagin's minimum principle).
  • The Hamiltonians are additive for Pareto optimization. Therefore, we can add local Hamiltonians for individual agents to create an aggregate mean field Hamiltonian.
  • Let Hi be the local Hamiltonian for agent i and let Hi MF be the mean field
  • Hamiltonian composed of the Hamiltonians for all other agents, excluding i. That is, the mean field Hamiltonian for agent i is a functional form of the Hamiltonians of the other agents.
  • Then the two-agent optimization problem is
  • Min u i , u i MF , α 1 , α 2 α 1 H i ( x i , u i ) + α 2 H i MF ( x i MF , u i MF )
  • subject to the state and costate equations of the combined Hamiltonian, and

  • α1(t)+α2(t)=1.
  • The state consists of [xi,xi MF]T, the costate is [pi,pi MF]T, and the control is [ui,ui MF]T. The initial conditions for xi MF and pi MF come from the previous solution, and ui is the local solution from the previous pass.
  • The solution to the two-agent Pareto game provides α1(t) and α2(t), and the total Hamiltonian for agent i is updated:

  • H i T1 H i2 H i MF
  • The modified Hamiltonian for agent i is constructed by projecting the total Hamiltonian into the local state space. The modified mean field Hamiltonian is constructed by projecting the total Hamiltonian into the mean field state space.
  • Now, the another agent plays the game, solving the two-agent Pareto game, and updating locally, and each agent updates its mean field agent when it is ready to play its game.
  • The following discusses further details regarding example embodiments.
  • Overview
  • The Cooperative Distributed Inference (CDI) platform is a unique advanced technology offering to enable near-optimal and near-real-time decision making on vast amount of heterogeneous and distributed information, in complex knowledge-based decision support systems, combining absolute, hard and soft rules to handle various requirements from natural or governing laws, policies, and best practices. FIG. 17 illustrates a diagram 1700 of various interactions of different portions of a CDI system.
  • The CDI platform features a Distributed Architecture (DA) for resolving queries by accessing information from both an Internal Heterogeneous Database (IHDB) and external data sources referred to as Sensors. CDI utilizes a network of computing devices as its nodes—called Decision Elements (DE)—that cooperate to resolve queries given to them.
  • The Decision Elements (DE) in a given DA can work together to reach best outcome for the whole group, i.e., reaching Pareto Efficiency (also referred to as Pareto equilibrium)—a stable state where no change by any individual can be made to make the sum of whole group better.
  • Each DE can solve the problem independently if provided with complete knowledge and data. DE solves the query with a very unique approach, using Optimal Control Theory, starting with a technique called analytic continuation (transforming query and rules into differential equations whose dependent variables represent internal variables and parameters of the rules), then using its own internal knowledge to solve the query, providing an outcome.
  • In distributed environments, group of Decision Elements synchronize in an iterative process utilizing updates from other DEs and provide a final result, via a Pareto multi criteria optimization strategy.
  • The CDI platform needs rules, not necessarily exact criteria, to reach the objective state, producing the near-optimal solution. This is a very attractive feature when exact quantitative criteria cannot be provided in advance due to uncertainty or other reasons.
  • Platform Features
  • CDI is perfect for big data analytics, supporting many data types:
      • Structured: databases, ontologies
      • Semi-structured: spreadsheets, CSV/TSV, forms, emails
      • Unstructured: web pages, blogs, text documents
      • Symbolic: business rules, math formulas
  • CDI's distributed computing architecture also make it very scalable to handle large amount (peta-size) of heterogeneous data ingestion while performing real-time analytic results even in microseconds (depending in part on resources available and the complexity of queries).
  • Rules Support
  • CDI can integrate different types of business rules: absolute, hard and soft rules, from natural or government laws, operational or policy requirements, and practice guidelines. Absolute rules and hard rules always take logic value 0 (false) or 1 (true) when instantiated. Soft rules, however, may take any value in the interval [0, 1], or more generally more than two values. Absolute rules reflects a must-satisfy situation, such as FDA/USDA requirements; hard rules are operational requirements such as “no serious persistent side effects”, but which may be temporarily relaxed in specific situations; and soft rules can come from guidelines or experiences, such as “better not give drug XYZ to diabetes patients with heart problems”. FIG. 18 illustrates a diagram 1800 of examples of different types of rules. Please note that all chaining of the rules may happen automatically in a dynamic manner during the optimization process. CDI handles this complexity with said techniques above by solving a distributed continuous-space optimization problem.
  • Self-Adapting and Learning
  • CDI platform features a self-learning design. As CDI converts the original query solving into an optimal control problem, it can use feedbacks from the environment (external sensor or internal updates from peer decision elements) to refine its internal model: a Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman equation will be updated to reflect new information and automatically form soft-rule like constraints internally. The process to update internal mathematical model is similar to reconstructing 3D images from CT or MRI imaging by tomographic reconstruction, but used for dynamic systems.
  • Scalability and Performance
  • CDI platform enables functionality to:
      • Integrate data that may include 1,000,000+ variables and 100,000+ of constraints
      • Provide data integration over evolving distributed network
      • Specify queries over a broad range of languages
      • Specify queries of a broad range of complexity
      • Provide best known response to queries at the local level
      • Operate in a variety of environments including cloud-based or local deployments
      • Real-time processing of queries
    Comparisons
  • CDI stands out in being able to do the following things:
      • Approximate the optimal solution of NP-hard problems (such as planning and scheduling) by mapping criteria and constraints onto a continuous space and solve it as an Optimal Control problem with polynomial-time algorithms. The solutions offered by CDI may be near optimal rather than exactly optimal but the running time will be greatly shortened and some large-scale intractable problems can become solvable by CDI.
      • Blend adaptive learning together with rules composition. Traditional rule engines might support hard and soft rules (constraints), but the scoring mechanism and weights need be manually adjusted to meet the goals, while in CDI, via feedback mechanism, these weights can be optimized as internal configurations.
  • The unique abilities make CDI an ideal choice for intelligent decision support systems.
  • Sample Applications
  • CDI platform works great in areas where there are a lot of heterogeneous data, government compliances and business requirements, such as healthcare and energy.
  • Clinical Auto-Coding Application
  • A Clinical Auto-Coding (C.A.C.) application can be used to detect medical under-coding, over-coding, and miscoding, highlighting potential opportunities where higher billing is justified. It automatically generates clinical codes, including ICD-10 directly from clinical encounter notes such as physician notes, lab results, and discharge records, while supporting workflows accommodating the roles played by administrators, coders and doctors in coding. FIG. 19 illustrates an example user interface 1900 related to medical/clinical auto-coding. C.A.C. incorporates user feedback to learn coding best practices as it processes records. With its sophisticated adaptive technology, C.A.C. improves over time, optimizing coding for each organization to improve the efficiency, accuracy and revenue capture of the medical coding activity
  • Clinical Intelligence Web Services
  • CDI powers the following intelligent healthcare services that can be easily integrated:
      • Clinical Record Intelligence—For analysis of EMRs (electronic medical records) and encounter notes, identification of actionable clinical terms and concepts in those documents. The services can extract concepts, understand issues, and analyze documents.
      • Clinical Coding Intelligence—For inferring clinical codes from a set of clinical concepts, grouping codes, correlating codes, analyze documents, audit and justification, and compliance.
      • Patient-Centric Intelligence—Secure delivery of end-user applications to predict, recommend, and explain personalized actions to improve patient outcomes. It provides a patient centric view, can provide medical risk prediction and proactive monitoring for patients, automated data abstraction, actionable recommendations, and more.
  • All these web services run in secure cloud with full compliance measurement in place.
  • Fraud, Waste and Abuse Detection
  • In healthcare, CDI helps assess and monitor risk of medical fraud, waste and abuse (FWA) by uncovering providers, and to a lesser extent pharmacies, who are suspected of having committed fraud via a variety of schemes. Similar application domains include financial frauds.
  • By ingesting a wide variety of data that is difficult to link (including live public data), a FWA service analyzes data to find evidence and patterns of fraud, and provides a dashboard application for agents/detectives to prioritize and act on the discovered suspected cases of medical fraud. The service features strict and fuzzy rules-based detection as well as automatic pattern discovery, and runs in real-time and continuous mode to support proactive monitoring and action.
  • Energy Intelligence
  • Smart Grid can involve uncertain bi-directional exchange in distributed grids, so intelligent control can be used to provide active synchronization between the network of element controllers and the outside grid management system allows high quality of service to be maintained in a cost-effective manner, hence the dynamics can be learned from sensory observations. CDI enables distributed micro-grid control, supports inductive modeling with “soft” rules that are learned and continuously updated, to optimize the grid.
  • Distributed Architecture (DA)
  • The DA is a network of interacting components called decision elements (DEs). The DEs collaborate in the resolution of a query posed by one of them. The DA's block diagram is shown in FIG. 18, where Sensors refer to external input data in general. There is an additional translation layer to process external data to be consumed by DEs.
  • Decision Element (DE)
  • A decision element is a higher-level functional component solving queries locally. It can have subcomponents such as a programmable search engine, internal heterogeneous database, Inference engine, Inference rule base, API/user interface, and network interface. A decision element is capable of providing a quick and near-optimal solution to a complex query with complete input of data.
  • Internal Heterogeneous Database (IHDB) and External Knowledge Base (EKB)
  • IHDB is data preprocessed and stored by a specific decision element (DE). FIG. 20 illustrates a diagram 2000 of some components of a CDI system, including Knowledge Bases containing data sources ranging from domain knowledge to general facts. IHDB encodes knowledge into knowledge components (KC's). Each KC is used and updated by a DE in the DA, and multiple KCs may share rules.
  • External Knowledge Base (EKB) refers to data, including rules, as input into specific decision elements, such as patient's body temperature, blood pressure, or instantiated rule to determine if patient's cholesterol level is high. EKB can also contain communicated information from other DEs. Domains for variables include: real, complex, integer, binary numbers and symbolic token on finite domains.
  • Interfacing Components
  • The following components act between users and the data via API and/or GUI.
      • Rule Entry Interface—It provides the entry of rules into the IHDB, validates the specification of rules before insertion, and route the rules to the appropriate DE for insertion to their respective knowledge components.
      • Sensor Ingestion Interface—A sensor is a machine or service where external data exist. Sensor Ingestion Interface (SII) enables the system to add or remove a sensor, poll a sensor and submit data to the network.
      • Query Language Interface—Query Language Interface accepts the query, submits it to the system (Distributed Architecture) and provides response. It is an API and flexible UI can be built on top of it.
    Minimization Function Generator (MFG)
  • The minimization function generator converts a query to a minimization function (i.e. analytic continuation). This is useful because the problem is converted from search problem in a large discrete space (like graph search problems, which are usually NP-complete) into an optimization problem in continuous space (polynomial algorithms exist). An analogy is NP-hard integer programming, while continuous linear programming has a very efficient solution.
  • Query Response Engine (QRE)
  • The Query Response Engine is the core of the whole system responsible solving the query (locally). A mathematical model is constructed based on these equations obtained from previous steps, containing the current state and object state (goal state). The continuous-space optimization automatically handles forward and backward rule chaining by moving along the trajectory toward target state. It also manages uncertainty by keeping a large set of possible states and reducing the solution space only when more information becomes available. Standard optimization techniques (e.g. Newton-Raphson Method) can be employed to solve the problem.
  • Feedbacks and updates (data from EKB or other DE in the architecture) will be used to refine the mathematical model over time; therefore, the core engine is self-adapting.
  • Pareto Multi-Criteria Optimization Engine
  • The Pareto Multi-Criteria Optimization Engine (PMOE) is the aggregation step where all DE in the network settle to obtain a good stable solution—a state where no improvements can be made to any individual DE without reducing the whole team's performance—a state belongs Pareto Optimal Set in Game Theory. It is like each DE is playing a game and they communicate and interact and work together to make the best outcome for the criteria (query). To efficiently synchronize all decision elements, Mean Field Theory is applied for dimension reduction using knowledge obtained. FIG. 21 illustrates a diagram 2100 of performing Pareto processing for use with mean field techniques, including to reach Pareto efficiency.
  • Data Exchange Specifications
  • The system can take many different data types via ingestion API and has adapters from different public data sources. The supported data types include common ones from XML, CSV, TSV, SQL, Spreadsheet, JSON, and more. OData support is also available. Output types can be API (XML or JSON), as well as exporting to CSV, SQL or directly to services such as SOLR and Cassandra.
  • Running Environment
  • CDI can run in the cloud as Software as a Service platform. We can provide whole end-to-end support by setting up the infrastructure in a Virtual Private Cloud or deploy and configure it with the cluster clients provide. The system features SaaS architecture and provides APIs to be used by third parties. For advanced integration requests, Java/Scala and Python libraries are available.
  • To sum up, CDI platform utilizes many advanced techniques from Mean Field Theory, Lagrangian and Hamiltonian functions, Pareto Optimal Set, Gauge Theory, and so on derived from modern mathematics, quantum physics, optimal control and game theory to achieve high performance. In the detailed computation process, lots of transformation, approximation, optimization, caching and other advanced computing techniques are used to improve accuracy, speed and scalability. Due to this unique approach, CDI is able to solve complex decision making problem in a smoothly, efficient manner and achieve near optimal results.
  • The Cooperative Distributed Inference (CDI) platform is a unique advanced technology offering to enable near-optimal and near real-time decision making on vast amount of heterogeneous and distributed information, in complex knowledge-based decision support systems, combining absolute, hard and soft rules to handle various requirements from natural or governing laws, policies, and best practices.
  • Each agent in the Distributed Architecture is a Decision Element that can solve the problem independently, provided with knowledge base and data. In a very unique manner, the agent uses Optimal Control Theory to obtain a near optimal solution, starting with a technique called analytic continuation (transforming query and rules into differential equations whose dependent variables represent internal variables and parameters of the rules), then using its own internal knowledge to solve the problem as an optimization problem in continuous space, to allow for efficient solving.
  • The outcome will be fed back to the Rules Editor and optimization process (the Chattering algorithm) to enable automatic adjustment of weights of soft rules (constraints) and achieve optimal score of the objective function.
  • A CDI agent is an independent decision element that can take in sensor data (input from the environment, streaming or in batches), as well as the knowledge-bases (rules composed by domain experts, including absolute, hard and soft rules) to generate a set of partial differential functions (Lagrangian constraints), through continualization. Similarly, the objective is also converted into a minimization function, as part of the Lagrangians which will be solved via the Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman equation. Each agent will talk to other agents via a “mean field” abstraction layer to greatly reduce the communication and computation overhead, and incorporate additional information to reach the global optimal state (a stable, near optimal set of states across all agents). Finally, the agent exercises control over the system. FIG. 22 illustrates a network diagram 2200 of an example decision module agent.
  • Various domain knowledge is captured from experts in the form of Domain Specific Language. Some are constraints; logic forms need be converted to Boolean equations; and variables in soft rules take values [0 . . . 1]. This creates a set of equations to be solved by the optimization algorithm. The optimization process takes data from a time range and finds the best state configuration to reach optimality. It starts with a “learning” process to find a good initial configuration by taking in a short history of data, before processing real-time streams. FIG. 23 illustrates a network diagram 2300 of an example of offline workflows for knowledge capture.
  • Each CDI agent computes a “mean field” view of the system via its neighbors, and responds to queries with the latest updates. The approximate mean field view of a group greatly reduces computational dimensions. The agents synchronize with others and understand the global state via the mean-field approximation. They engage in games to reach Pareto Optimal (also referred to as Pareto equilibrium)—the best output. FIG. 24 illustrates a network diagram 2400 of an example of workflows for mean field computation and Pareto Optimal.
  • An example home solar micro-grid system illustrates one example embodiment of a CDI application or automated control system, which takes the sensor data from the solar panel (in the house), substation, and power network, and decides whether or not to fulfill the utility requests in real time using a set of complex rules. FIG. 25 illustrates a network diagram 2500 of an example of an automated control system for a home solar micro-grid electrical generating system.
  • FIGS. 26-28 provide further details regarding operations of portions of example CDI systems and their sub-components, and FIGS. 29A-29K illustrate examples of using a CDI system to iteratively determine near-optimal solutions over time for controlling a target system in diagrams 2900A-2900K. In particular, FIG. 26 illustrates a further diagram 2600 of workflow and components of a portion of a CDI system, FIG. 28 illustrates a diagram 2800 of an overview workflow for a portion of a CDI system, and FIG. 27 illustrates a diagram 2700 of workflow for an inference process portion of a CDI system.
  • Further details related to an example CDI system are shown below and included in provisional U.S. Patent Application No. 62/015,018, filed Jun. 20, 2014 and entitled “Methods And Systems For Cooperative Distributed Inferencing,” which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In addition, further details related to example details of using gauges to perform model error measurements are included in provisional U.S. Patent Application No. 62/182,796, filed Jun. 22, 2015 and entitled “Gauge Systems,” which is also hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Furthermore, further details related to examples of using the CDD system in particular manners with particular types of target systems are included in provisional U.S. Patent Application No. 62/182,968, filed Jun. 22, 2015 and entitled “Applications Of Cooperative Distributed Control Of Target Systems,” which is also hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety—the example types of target systems discussed include, for example, a vehicle being controlled, controlling inventory management, controlling a micro-grid electrical generation facility, controlling activities in a day trader financial setting, etc.
  • Current notation Comments
    t Notation for algorithmic time.
    q(t) Notation of canonical
    coordinate vector for entire
    system.
    q Notation of canonical
    coordinate vector dropping
    time dimension.
    q(ƒ) Notation of canonical
    coordinate vector for specific
    function ƒ.
    {dot over (q)} Notation of first time
    derivative of canonical
    coordinate vector.
    {umlaut over (q)} Notation of second time
    derivative of canonical
    coordinate vector.
    h Notation of HEAD of Horn
    clause.
    φ(q) Notation of generic
    proposition.
    σ(q) Notation of generic
    proposition alternate to φ.
    Ti Notation of the TV of a soft
    rule.
    {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) Generic equational form
    relating two propositions.
    {hacek over (φ)}(q) Notation of the equational
    form of φ(q).
    φQ(q) Notation for proposition
    defined by the query.
    {hacek over (φ)}Q(q) Notation for equation defined
    by the query.
    J(q) Notation for minimization
    function for the query.
    L Notation for static
    Lagrangian
    Lk (o, T) Notation for total static
    Lagrangian for DEk.
    q
    {pα}
    u(k)
    Hk (o) Primary Hamiltonian for the
    absolute rules for DEk.
    Hk (A) Hamiltonian for the Tellegen
    agent of the total
    Hamiltonian's rules.
    Hk (T) Total Hamiltonian for DEk.
  • Overview
  • This document introduces and specifies the architecture for the Cooperative Distributed Inferencing Platform (CDIP). The primary instance of this is the Distributed Architecture (DA) for resolving queries by accessing both an Internal Heterogeneous Database (IHDB) populated by a special class of Horn Clause rules and external data sources referred to as sensors.
  • The architecture implements a network of active devices at its nodes. These devices are called Decision Elements (DE's). The DE's cooperate in the resolution of a query posed to one or several of them. The DE's in a given DA are referred to as the team.
  • Every DE in a team is programmed to transform rules in its domain, determined by a posed query, into an ordinary differential equation (ODE), whose dependent variables represent internal variables and parameters. The dependent variables include unknowns of the query posed to the DE. The DE's in the architecture are synchronized via a Pareto multi criteria optimization strategy.
  • The components of the CDIP include:
      • Application requirements that the system is designed to accommodate.
      • Functional requirements that satisfy the application requirements and pertain directly to the construction and operation of the system components.
      • Subcomponents which are necessary to implement the functional requirements
      • Limitations which highlight noteworthy constraints which are inherent the specified implementation of the architecture.
      • Architectural flow describes key aspects of the architecture that indicate how the system is to be constructed given the specified essence and key behavior of the subcomponents.
      • Software realization of the architecture describes the key pieces of software necessary for system implementation.
      • Data describes the kinds of data the system is expected to accept as input and produce as output.
      • Data exchange protocols reference key data types and structures that need to be exchanged across the system and the protocols for exchange.
      • Environment describes the particulars of the environments that the system will be able to operate in and therefore should be tested in.
      • Testing describes how the system should be tested given the data and operating environments.
    Subcomponents
  • Subcomponents are fundamental parts of the architecture that perform particular roles. This section contains descriptions for each of the subcomponents of the architecture. The subcomponents are:
      • The Distributed Architecture (DA).
      • The Internal Heterogeneous Database (IHDB).
      • The Rule Entry Interface (REI).
      • The Rule Editor (RE).
      • The External Knowledge Base (EKB).
      • The Sensor Ingestion Interface (SII).
      • The Rule Conversion Engine (RCE).
      • The Decision Element (DE).
      • The Query Language Interface (QLI).
      • The Minimization Function Generator (MFG).
      • The Query Response Engine (QRE).
      • The Pareto Multi-Criteria Optimization Engine (PMOE).
    Distributed Architecture (DA)
  • The DA is a platform of interacting components called DE's. The DE's collaborate in the resolution of a query posed by one of them. The DE's implement a distributed, dynamic optimization process, herein referred as the optimization process (OP). OP implements an optimization process that computes an answer to the active queries as a function of data stored in two categories of repositories: IHDB and EKB's. These repositories of the data needed to implement OP given a query.
  • The EKB's are a collection of public or private repositories of knowledge relevant to the DE posing a query. A DE has a list of external repositories (LER). Each entry in an LER includes 1) a protocol, 2) a heading sub-list, and 3) a translation grammar. Each protocol entry prescribes the access procedure to the corresponding knowledge repository. Each heading sub-list entry contains a summary of the knowledge contents of the corresponding repository. Finally, each translation grammar entry provides a procedure for converting knowledge elements of the corresponding repository in to the rule representation in the IHDB of the DE.
  • Functional characteristics of this architecture and in particular, the DE's, IHDB, and the sensors are described, including the following concepts:
      • The DA
      • A process for resolving queries by accessing the IHDB and External Knowledge Bases (EKB's) through sensors
      • The constitution of DE's
      • A query and corresponding rules transformation into an ODE
      • The orchestration of a team of DE's through a Pareto multi criteria optimization strategy
  • The Internal Heterogeneous Database (IHDB)
  • Composition of IHDB as a Set of Knowledge Components
  • The IHDB encodes knowledge about the implemented application. The IHDB is divided into knowledge components (KC's). Each KC is consulted and updated by a DE in the DA. Any pair of KC's may have an overlapping set of rules by which they operate, but there is no a priori constraint on intersections or inclusion. The collection of KC's constitutes the existing knowledge of the system.
  • Algorithmic Formulation of a Rule
  • A KC is a collection of rules, written in a restrictive Horn clause format. The rules are logic entities. When a rule is instantiated, it has a logic value. The logic values a rule can have are taken from the interval [0, 1]. The entire system of rules is evaluated using variables and parameters which are collectively referred to as the generalized coordinates of the system and are indexed as follows:

  • q(t)={q (1)(t), . . . ,q (N)(t)}.  (3.2-1)
  • The time argument t refers to the algorithmic time of the system which means that it has no other meaning than as a continuous index with respect to the evolution of the system. There is therefore no requirement that it correspond to a physical aspect of the system although this may naturally occur. Physical time may be represented specifically by a canonical coordinate of choice q(i)(t). Alternatively, we may refer to the q's without expressly stating the independent time argument and write

  • q(t)={q (1) , . . . ,q (N)}.  (3.2-2)
  • Then we should also note that the time derivatives are referred to notationally as
  • q . = q ( t ) t , q ¨ = 2 q ( t ) t 2 ( 3.2 - 3 )
  • These coordinates are referred to variously as q depending on the context and the expected arguments of the function to which they are applied. When it is necessary to distinguish between more than one q in equational form we generally write qf of where f denotes the reference function or appropriate domain. Typically, we assume without loss of generality the entire set of canonical coordinates q is an argument to any function, term or proposition. In practice, we may further assume it is possible to apply the particular required coordinates as need to mathematical construct in question.
  • The rules in each knowledge component are of three types: absolute rules, hard rules, and soft rules. Absolute rules and hard rules take logic value 0 (false) or 1 (true) when instantiated. Soft rules take any value in the interval [0, 1].
  • The format of the restrictive Horn Clauses in the IHDB is illustrated in Equation 3.2-2. A Horn Clause is an object composed of two objects a HEAD and a BODY connected by backward Implication (
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00016
    ). The logic implication transfers the logic value of the BODY to the HEAD. If the rule is an absolute rule or a hard rule, the logic value is 1 (if the BODY is logically true) or 0 (if the BODY is logically false). If the rule is a soft rule, the logic value transferred by the body is any number in [0, 1].
  • The HEAD is a data structure composed of two objects: A name, h, and a list of arguments described by the argument vector q=(q(1), q(n)). The list of arguments includes variables and parameters. The variables take values in the domain of the rule and the parameters are constants passed to the rule and unchanged by the instantiation of the rule. The domain of the rule is a set of values that each of its variables can take. In general, variables can take values over numerical or symbolic domains. As an example, a symbolic domain can be a list of diseases. A numeric domain can be a set of pairs of numbers representing blood pressure.
  • For the applications of CU, the domains for variables are: real numbers, complex numbers (floating point and floating point complex numbers), integer numbers, binary numbers and symbolic token on finite domains.
  • The BODY of a clause is a data structure composed of one or more terms, denoted φi(q). The composition operation is extended- and, denoted by: ̂. The extended- and works as a regular and in absolute rules and hard rules and as a functional product2 on soft rules.
  • A rule with a head but not a body is called a fact. A fact's truth value is determined on the basis of the instantiation of its variables.
  • Each term in the body of a rule is an extended disjunction (or denoted by v) of sub-terms. The v operator behaves like the standard- or for absolute and hard rules and behaves in a functional form, described later, when connecting sub-terms encoding heads of soft rules.
  • A sub-term is either the HEAD of a rule, a relation or a truth valuation (TV). When it is a HEAD it may have the same name as the one in the HEAD of the rule but with different arguments. This provides a recursive mechanism for rule evaluation.
  • When a rule has a sub-term that is the head of another rule it is said that the two rules are chained together by the corresponding sub-term. Note that a rule can be chained to several rules via corresponding sub-terms.
  • Constraint Domains
  • Constraint domains augment the BODY clause of Horn clauses to facilitate dynamic programming. Constraints are specified as a relationship between terms. Define the relationship between two terms

  • φ(q)relσ(q).  (3.2-4)
  • as a member of the following set

  • rel ε{=,≠,≦,≧,statistical propagation}.  (3.2-5)
  • A relation can be of two types numeric or symbolic. Numeric relations establish equational forms between two functional forms. (For the initial phase only polynomial and affine linear functional forms will be considered.)
  • In general, an equational form is a set of one or more relations. For numeric relations, φ(q) rel σ(q), rel ε{=, ≠, ≦, ≧, <, >, statistical propagation}. The table below gives the relations considered and their symbols.
  • TABLE EE
    Numeric Relation Symbol Code Form
    Equality = φ = σ
    Disequation φ \= σ
    Less-inequality < φ < σ
    Less-Equal φ =< σ
    Great-equality > φ > σ
    Great- inequality φ >= σ
  • The adopted code forms are the ones used in constraint logic programming.
  • A symbolic relation can be of two types: inclusion and constraint. Inclusion relations are of the form:

  • qεSet  (3.2-6)
  • Where x is a variable or a parameter, ε is the inclusion symbol and Set is a set of symbolic forms or a set of numbers or a composite set of the form shown in the table below.
  • TABLE FF
    Composite Set Symbol Code Form
    Intersection Set1/\Set2
    Union Set1\/Set2
    Complement \ \Set
  • Constraint forms of the symbolic relational type may be one or a set of the forms presented in the table below For numeric relations, φ(q) rel σ(q), rel ε {=, ≠, ⊂, ⊃, , }.
  • TABLE GG
    Symbolic Relation Symbol Code Form
    Equal = φ# = σ
    Not Equal φ# \= σ
    Is Contained φ# < σ
    Contains φ# > σ
    Is Contained or Equal φ# =< σ
    Contains or Equal φ# >= σ
  • A TV is either a variable or a constant with values in the interval [0, 1]. The TV of a Horn Clause that is an absolute rule or a hard rule can only take two values: 1 or 0. The TV when instantiated is 0 or 1. If the TV for an absolute or hard rule is 1, the rule is said to be in inactive state; if the TV is 0, the rule is said to be in active state.
  • The TV, Ti, of a soft rule satisfies

  • 0≦T i≦1.  (3.2-7)
  • If Ti above satisfies,

  • T i ≧T threshold  (3.2-8)
  • the soft clause is said to be in inactive state. If

  • T i <T threshold,  (3.2-9)
  • the soft clause is said to be in active state, where Tthreshold is a constant in [0, 1] defined for each soft clause. The default value is 0.5.
  • This concludes the description of the knowledge representation. The instantiation process of the goal in a DE, as function of its knowledge base, is carried out by the inference engine of the DE. This process is the central component of CU and will be described later on the document.
  • Summary of Terminology
  • The following table summarizes the terminology we have just reviewed.
  • TABLE HH
    Reference term Definition
    proposition Defined as a construct as in the
    prepositional calculus where the
    proposition takes on the value of true or
    false.
    term Recursively according to its assigned
    sub-term.
    sub-term A sub-term may be a Horn clause, a
    relation between two other sub-terms or
    an extended truth valuation depending
    on the context of absolute, hard or soft
    rules. In the case of absolute and hard
    rules it may be evaluated as a
    proposition. In the case of soft rules it
    takes a value on the interval [0, 1] and is
    considered to be active or true in the
    case that it exceeds its specific
    threshold.
    Horn clause A disjunction of terms with at most one
    positive term.
    definite clause A Horn clause with exactly one positive
    term.
    goal clause A Horn clause with no positive terms.
    fact A definite clause with no negative
    terms.
    head The positive term of a definite clause.
    inactive state The case when a rule will not apply for
    constrained optimization.
    active state The case when a rule will apply for
    constrained optimization.
    truth value, TV The value that is used to determine
    whether a rule is active or inactive.
  • Horn Clause Example
  • The following example illustrates a Horn clause:

  • has_fever(name, temperature, white_count, heartrate, blood_pressure)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00016
    (temperature>37)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    ((heartrate≧70)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00019
    bp(name, temperature, blood_pressure)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00020
    wc(name, white_count))  (3.2-10)
  • The clause establishes under which conditions the patient of name name, has a fever. The variables in clause are:
      • name, temperature, white_count, heartrate, blood_pressure.
  • When instantiated they represent, respectively, the name of the patient, his current body temperature, his white blood cell count, his heart rate range, and his blood pressure.
  • The clause body includes other clauses: bp (blood pressure) and wc (white count).
  • This completes the specification of the rule-based framework. The next step is to specify a complete process for converting all rules of this form to a set of equations.
  • Rule Entry Interface (REI)
  • The Rule Entry Interface provides a mechanism for:
      • Providing an API for the entry of rules into the IHDB.
      • Validating the specification of rules to be inserted into the IHDB.
      • Routing the rules to the appropriate DE's for insertion to their respective KC's.
  • Rule Editor (RE)
  • The Rule Editor allows users to specify rules associated with the systems to be interrogated.
  • External Knowledge Base (EKB)
      • It may be distributed or not
      • It may be persisted or not
      • It may be persisted locally or remotely to an agent
      • It may or may not be architecturally co-located with the IHDB
      • A sensor may include any source of data used by the agent
      • It may use various types of buses for data communication
      • Sensors may or may not be co-located with agents/DEs
  • Rule Conversion Engine (RCE)
  • The rule conversion engine converts rules of the IHDB into equations.
  • Method for Specification of a Simple Term as an Equation
  • Consider the term φ(q) with the following truth assignment.
  • ϕ ( q ) = { T q ϕ F q ϕ ( 3.6 - 1 )
  • Then we can define the set of arguments which yield positive truth assignment.

  • {
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00021
    φ|φ(q)←T}.  (3.6-2)
  • Define the corresponding equation {hacek over (φ)}(q) of the term φ(q) as
  • ϕ ( q ) = { 1 ϕ ( q ) T 0 ϕ ( q ) F ( 3.6 - 3 )
  • Then extend the range of {hacek over (φ)}(a) to the closed unit interval

  • {hacek over (φ)}(q)→[0,1].  (3.6-4)
  • Revisiting the taxonomy of absolute, hard and soft rules, we recognize that hard and soft rules (terms in this example) can take values along the interval

  • 0≦{hacek over (φ)}(q)≦1.  (3.6-5)
  • And for absolute rules we add the constraint {hacek over (φ)}(q)→{0,1}

  • {hacek over (φ)}(q)(1−{hacek over (φ)}(q))=0.  (3.6-6)
  • Conversion of Fundamental Clauses of Propositional Calculus to Equations
  • Define the following notation for the propositional calculus.
  • TABLE II
    Symbol Function
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00022
    And
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00023
    Or
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00024
    Implication
    ~ Not
    Exists
    All
    Fuzzy rule
  • Theorem 3.6.1.
  • Given the method for the specification of equations from propositions, we prove the following transformations.
  • TABLE JJ
    Proposition Equation
    ~φ(q) 1 − {hacek over (φ)}(q)
    φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00025
     σ(q)
    {hacek over (φ)}(q) · {hacek over (σ)}(q)
    φ (q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00026
     σ(q)
    {hacek over (φ)}(q) + {hacek over (σ)}(q) − {hacek over (φ)}(q) · {hacek over (σ)}(q)
    φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00027
     σ(q)
    1 − {hacek over (φ)}(q) + {hacek over (φ)}(q) · {hacek over (σ)}(q)
    φ1(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00025
     φ2(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00025
     . . .
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00025
    φk−1(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00025
     φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00027
     φ(q)
    φ ~ ˇ ( n , q ) = h ˇ ( n - 1 , q ) σ ~ ˇ ( n , q ) φ ~ ˇ ( n - 1 , q ) - 1
    (tail recursive)
  • Proof by enumeration for equational representation of conjunction
  • Define the function {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) which represents the equation corresponding to conjunction (
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    ). Verify by enumeration the correspondence of the mathematical equation values corresponding to the mapping T→1 and F→0.
  • TABLE KK
    φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00028
    σ(q) {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) = {hacek over (φ)}(q) · {hacek over (σ)}(q)
    T T T 1 = 1 · 1
    T F F 0 = 1 · 0
    F F T 0 = 0 · 1
    F F F 0 = 0 · 0
  • Proof by enumeration for equational representation of disjunction
  • Define the function {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) which represents the equation corresponding to disjunction (
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    ). Verify by enumeration the correspondence of the mathematical equation values corresponding to the mapping T→1 and F→0.
  • TABLE LL
    φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00029
    σ(q) {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) = {hacek over (φ)}(q) + {hacek over (σ)}(q) − {hacek over (φ)}(q) · {hacek over (σ)}(q)
    T T T 1 = 1 + 1 − 1 · 1
    T T F 1 = 1 + 0 − 1 · 0
    F T T 1 = 0 + 1 − 0 · 1
    F F F 0 = 0 + 0 − 0 · 0
  • Proof by enumeration for equational representation of negation
  • Define the function {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) which represents the equation corresponding to negation (
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    ). Verify by enumeration the correspondence of the mathematical equation values corresponding to the mapping T→1 and F→0.
  • TABLE MM
    φ(q) ~φ(q) {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) = 1 − {hacek over (φ)}(q)
    T F 0 = 1 − 1
    F T 1 = 1 − 0
  • Proof by enumeration for equational representation of implication
  • Define the function {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) which represents the equation corresponding to disjunction (
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00030
    ). First note the equivalence of

  • φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00030
    σ(q) and ˜φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00031
    σ(q).  (3.6-7)
  • Verify by enumeration the correspondence of the mathematical equation values corresponding to the mapping T→1 and F→0.
  • TABLE NN
    ~φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00032
    σ(q) {hacek over (r)}(q; φ, σ) = 1 − {hacek over (φ)}(q) + {hacek over (φ)}(q) · {hacek over (σ)}(q)
    T T T 1 = 1 − 1 + 1 · 1
    T F F 0 = 1 − 1 + 1 · 0
    F T T 1 = 1 − 0 + 0 · 1
    F T F 1 = 1 − 0 + 0 · 0
  • Proof for equational representation of tail recursion
  • Tail recursion is propositionally defined as

  • φ(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00016
    φ1(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    . . .
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    φk−1(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    φ(q)  (3.6-8)
  • where s represent the current state. To develop an equational representation of the recursive formulation, first define the general function {tilde over (φ)}(n, q) where n represents the nth iteration of the tail recursion ad {tilde over (φ)}(n, q) is the logical consequent. Then rewrite the above formulation using the recursive step.

  • {tilde over (φ)}(n,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    {tilde over (φ)}2(n,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    . . .
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    {tilde over (φ)}k−1(n,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    {tilde over (φ)}(n−1,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00030
    {tilde over (φ)}(n,q)  (3.6-9)

  • Define

  • {tilde over (σ)}(n,q){tilde over (=)}{tilde over (φ)}1(n,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    {tilde over (φ)}2(n,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    . . .
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    {tilde over (φ)}k−1(n,q){tilde over (r)}(n−1,q){tilde over (=)}{tilde over (σ)}(n,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    {tilde over (φ)}(n−1,q)  (3.6-10)
      • Then the tail recursion is rewritable as

  • {tilde over (σ)}(n,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    {tilde over (φ)}(n−1,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00030
    {tilde over (φ)}(n,q){tilde over (r)}(n−1,q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00030
    {tilde over (φ)}(n,q).  (3.6-11)
  • According to the equational representation of implication, let

  • {hacek over (h)}(n−1,q)=1−{hacek over ({tilde over (σ)}(n,q)·{hacek over ({tilde over (φ)}(n−1,q)+{hacek over ({tilde over (σ)}(n,q)·{hacek over ({tilde over (φ)}(n−1,q)·{hacek over ({tilde over (φ)}(n,q).  (3.6-12)
  • Since by definition {circumflex over ({tilde over (r)}(n−1, q)={circumflex over ({tilde over (φ)}(n, q)·{circumflex over ({tilde over (φ)}(n−1, q). Then
  • ϕ ~ ( n , q ) = h ^ ( n - 1 , q ) + σ ~ ^ ( n , q ) · ϕ ~ ^ ( n - 1 , q ) - 1 σ ~ ^ ( n , q ) · ϕ ~ ^ ( n - 1 , q ) ( 3.6 - 13 )
  • with boundary condition n=0.
  • Converting Rules Based System of Inference to the Problem of Constrained Minimization
  • Consider the following example.
      • Converting rules to constraints
  • The preceding discussion has established an algorithm for convert rules of the form

  • h(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00016
    φ1(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    φ2(q)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    . . .
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    φm(q)  (3.6-14)
  • To constraints of the form

  • {hacek over (h)}(q)={hacek over (φ)}1(q)·{hacek over (φ)}2(q)· . . . ·{hacek over (φ)}m(q).  (3.6-15)
  • Decision Element (DE)
  • A diagram of the Decision Element Architecture is shown in illustration ◯◯. It is composed six elements:
      • Programmable search engine (PSE)
      • Internal heterogeneous database (IHDB)
      • Inference engine (IE)
      • Inference rule base (IRB)
      • API/user interface
      • Network interface (NI)
  • List of External Repositories (LER)
  • A DE has a List of External Repositories (LER). Each entry in an LER includes 1) a protocol, 2) a heading sub-list, and 3) a translation grammar. Each protocol entry prescribes the access procedure to the corresponding external knowledge repository. Each heading sub-list entry contains a summary of the knowledge contents of the corresponding repository. Finally, each translation grammar entry provides a procedure for converting knowledge elements of the corresponding repository in to the rule representation in the IHDB of the DE.
  • Programmable Search Engine
  • The programmable search engine implements a standard hashing algorithm for detecting active rules as a function of the current instantiation of the variables in a variable buffer (VB) of the IE, and the contents of the active rule buffer (ARB). The VB contains the variables that form part of the query and all additional variables incorporated to this buffer during the inference process (IP). The VB includes all relevant data from the EKB beneficial to perform the query. The IP will be described below. The ARB contains all the currently active rules in the IP.
  • The search hashing algorithm is characterized by the search rules in the Inference Rule Base.
  • Internal Heterogeneous Database
  • The IHDB is the repository of the application clauses associated with the DE. These encode the domain of knowledge characterizing the expertise of the DE. For example in a medical application, a decision element may deal with expertise on heart illnesses, and the corresponding clauses might encode diagnoses and treatments for these diseases.
  • Inference Engine
  • The IE encodes an algorithm, the IP, for assigning values to the variables appearing in the query.
  • Inference Rule Types
  • The DE incorporates inference rules (IR) that are a collection of rules for transforming and inferring instantiations of the goal. These rules provide the Inference Engine with directives for processing database rules to give a satisfactory instantiation to a given query or to request additional information so that a satisfactory instantiation can be generated. They are organized according to their functionality as follows. (See Illustration PP)
  • Equation Rules
  • These rules include the formal rules for inference. This includes all rules for natural language modeling from first principles.
  • Optimizer Rules
  • These rules include rules for finding the interior point in optimization.
  • Search Rules
  • These rules include rules for identifying the nature of insufficient potential. The goal is to apply these rules to acquire additional information required to satisfy the optimization goal.
  • Adaptation Rules
  • Adaptation rules are used to update the soft rules to relax them further to reduce the complexity and constrains of the optimization problem. The adaptation also serves to update the search rules to improve information acquisition.
  • Language Statistics and Pattern Rules
  • These rules embody the machine learning models.
  • Network Rules
  • These rules define how information is distributed over the network and what information is available from which resources.
  • Hybridization Rules
  • The rules define how other rules may be combined.
  • User Interface
  • The UI provides the utilities for entering queries, pragma rules, displaying query answers, status and for general interaction with the IE.
  • Network Interface
  • The NI provides a generic mechanism for interacting with other DE's via a procedure termed companionship. The companionship procedure implements the active coupling for the cooperation of the DE's in query resolution. This procedure is not hierarchical and implements a Pareto Agreement set strategy as the mechanism for Ca
  • Query Language Interface (QLI)
  • Information about the QLI is available elsewhere herein.
  • Process for Determining Active Constraints
  • The process for determining active constraints is available elsewhere herein.
  • Minimization Function Generator (MFG) and Determining Active Constraints
  • The minimization function generator converts a query to a minimization function.
  • Again, we assume without loss of generality the entire set of canonical coordinates q is an argument to any proposition φi. In practice, we may further assume it is possible to apply the particular required coordinates as need to the proposition or function in question. Then let φk be the set of propositions associated with DEk in the context of query Q. These propositions are composed of the proposition associated with the query φQ(q), and other propositions φi(q), comprising the constraints of the system. The proposition φQ(q) associated with a given query Q can be converted to an equation {hacek over (φ)}Q(q). Queries that are satisfiable specify a set.

  • {q|φ Q(q)←T}  (3.10-1)
  • Similarly, a satisfied query represented as an equation is also a set

  • {q|{hacek over (φ)} Q(q)=1}.  (3.10-2)
  • Relaxing the values that {hacek over (φ)}Q(•) can take to include the unit interval so that soft rules are incorporated yields the following constrained optimization expression. Let J(q)=({hacek over (φ)}Q(q)−1)2. Then specify the optimization
  • min q J ( q ) ( 3.10 - 3 )
  • Subject to:
      • 1. {hacek over (φ)}Q(q)≦1
      • 2. {hacek over (φ)}Q(q)≧0
      • 3. A knowledge base on the set {{hacek over (φ)}1(q), . . . , {hacek over (φ)}n(q), . . . , {hacek over (φ)}n+s(q)}{hacek over (φ)}(k) which represents a further set of active constraints specific to the problem:
        • a. {hacek over (φ)}i(q)≧0 for 1≦i≦n,
        • b. {hacek over (φ)}i(q)≦1 or, equivalently −({hacek over (φ)}i(q)−1)≧0 for 1≦i≦n,
        • c. and in the case of absolute rules {hacek over (φ)}l(q)(1−{hacek over (φ)}l(q))=0 for n<l≦n+s.
  • Introduce the indicator functions
  • V ϕ i - = { 0 ϕ i ( q ) 0 ϕ i ( q ) < 0 and ( 3.10 - 4 ) V ϕ i + = { 0 1 - ϕ i ( q ) 0 1 - ϕ i ( q ) < 0 ( 3.10 - 5 )
  • which yields the two logarithmic barrier functions

  • {hacek over (V)} {hacek over (φ)} i =−log({hacek over (φ)}i(q))  (3.10-6)

  • and

  • {hacek over (V)} {hacek over (φ)} i +=−log(1−{hacek over (φ)}i(q)).  (3.10-7)
  • According to the method of Lagrange multipliers, combine this with the equality constraints to form the static Lagrangian function
  • ( q ; ϕ Q , ϕ ( k ) , ω 1 ( + ) , , ω n ( + ) , ω n + 1 ( - ) , , ω 2 n ( - ) , ω 2 n + 1 ( λ ) , , ω 2 n + s ( λ ) , ω 2 n + s + 1 ( Q ) , ω 2 n + s + 2 ( Q ) ) = ϕ Q ( q ) + i = 1 n [ ω i ( + ) V ϕ i + + ω n + i ( - ) V ϕ i - ] + l = 1 s ω 2 n + 1 ( λ ) ϕ l ( q ) ( 1 - ϕ l ( q ) ) - ω 2 n + s + 1 ( Q ) log ( ϕ Q ( q ) ) - ω 2 n + s + 2 ( Q ) log ( 1 - ϕ Q ( q ) ) , ( 3.10 - 8 )
  • the roots of which can be found using a formulation of Newton-Raphson. Since
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
    here includes absolute, hard and soft rules we may call it the total static Lagrangian for DEk and refer to it as
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
    k (T).
  • Construct Equations of Motion
  • Information for equations of motion is available elsewhere herein.
  • Query Response Engine (QRE) which Includes Process for Constructing Differential Equations
  • Application of Newton-Raphson
  • Consider a continuous analog of the independent variables of
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
    (•)
  • q = q ( t ) = [ q ( 1 ) ( t ) q ( v ) ( t ) ] ( 3.12 - 1 )
  • where each of the v total independent variables of
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
    (•) is mapped to its corresponding position in q(t), the column vector that is represented with a lower-case q. To reiterate, the independent variable t refers algorithmic time as opposed to physical time which may also be represented in the system. The corresponding unconstrained optimization goal can be written as
  • min q 1 , , q v ( q ( 1 ) ( t ) , , q ( v ) ( t ) ) ( 3.12 - 2 )
  • so that ∇L(q)
  • ( q ( t ) ) = [ q ( 1 ) q ( v ) ] = [ 1 v ] = 0 , ( 3.12 - 3 )
  • with positive definite Hessian matrix
  • 2 ( q ( t ) ) = [ q ( 1 ) q ( 1 ) q ( 1 ) q ( v ) q ( v ) q ( 1 ) q ( v ) q ( v ) ] = [ 11 1 v v 1 vv ] = > 0. ( 3.12 - 4 )
  • Write the recursion for Newton's method

  • q (k+1)(t)=q (k)(t)−(∇2
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00034
    (q (k)(t)))−1
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00034
    (q (k)(t)).  (3.12-5)
  • This is equivalently rewritten
  • q ( k + 1 ) ( t ) - q ( k ) ( t ) δ = - 1 δ ( 2 ( q ( k ) ( t ) ) ) - 1 ( q ( k ) ( t ) ) . ( 3.12 - 6 )
  • Via continualization we approximate the derivative
  • q . ( t ) = q ( t ) t = - ( 2 ( q ( t ) ) ) - 1 ( q ( k ) ( t ) ) . ( 3.12 - 7 )
  • Translation of Inverted Matrix
  • Consider M, an invertible and positive definite matrix. Then we make the following provable assertions.
      • 1. ATA is symmetric.
      • 2. -ATA has negative eigenvalues.
  • Define
  • M ( t ) t = - A T AM ( t ) + A T ( 3.12 - 8 )
  • Then as t→∞, M(t)→A−1=∇2
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
    (q(k)(t))−1. Using (3.12-3) and (3.12-4) approximate {dot over (q)}(t) by rewriting the derivative in the context of M(t). This yields the following two equations.
  • q . ( t ) = - M ( t ) L ( q ( t ) ) = [ m 11 m 1 v m v 1 m vv ] [ 1 v ] = [ m 11 1 + + m 1 v v m v 1 1 + + m vv v ] ( 3.12 - 9 ) M ( t ) t = - ( 2 ( q ( t ) ) ) T ( 2 ( q ( t ) ) ) M ( t ) + ( 2 ( q ( t ) ) ) T = - [ 11 v 1 1 v vv ] [ 11 1 v v 1 vv ] [ m 11 m 1 v m v 1 m vv ] [ 11 v 1 1 v vv ] = - [ 11 2 + + v 1 2 11 1 v + + v 1 vv 11 1 v + + v 1 vv 1 v 2 + + vv 2 ] [ m 11 m 1 v m v 1 m vv ] + [ 11 v 1 1 v vv ] = - [ ( 11 2 + + v 1 2 ) m 11 + + ( 11 1 v + + v 1 vv ) m v 1 + 11 ( 11 2 + + v 1 2 ) m 1 v + + ( 11 1 v + + v 1 vv ) m vv + v 1 ( 11 1 v + + v 1 vv ) m 11 + + ( 1 v 2 + + vv 2 ) m v 1 + 1 v ( 11 1 v + + v 1 vv ) m 1 v + + ( 1 v 2 + + vv 2 ) m vv + vv ] = [ m 11 m 1 v m v 1 m vv ] ( 3.12 - 10 )
  • The approximation proceeds as follows, applying the Magnus expansion to compute the integral:
      • 1. Fix M(0)=∇2
        Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
        (q(t)) and =∇2
        Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
        (q(t)).
      • 2. Use the variation of constants formula to solve

  • M(T)=e −[∇ 2
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
    (q(T))] 2 t M(0)+[∫0 T e −[∇ 2
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
    (q(τ))] 2 (T−τ) dτ]∇ 2
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00033
    (q(T))
  • The following is computation flow, flowing down unless otherwise indicated.
  • Process for Determining Dynamic Lagrangian Via Hemholtz Equations
  • Given
  • G i ( q ¨ , q . , q ) = j = 1 n W i , j ( q . , q ) ( q . , q ) q ¨ ( j ) + K i ( q . , q ) = 0 j = 1 , , n ( 3.12 - 11 )
  • If the three conditions
  • G i q ¨ ( j ) = G j q ¨ ( i ) , G i q . ( j ) + G j q . ( i ) = t ( G i q ¨ ( j ) + G j q ¨ ( i ) ) , G i q ( j ) - G j q ( i ) = 1 2 t ( G i q . ( j ) - G j q . ( i ) ) , ( 3.12 - 12 )
  • with i, j=1, . . . , n hold, then
  • j = 1 n 2 L q . ( ) q . ( j ) q ¨ ( j ) + 2 L q ( j ) q . ( ) - L q ( ) = G i , i = 1 , , n ( 3.12 - 13 )
  • This is a second order, linear hyperbolic differential equation on the Lagrangian L. It can be solved efficiently by the method of characteristics.
  • Let
  • G ( q ¨ , q . , q ) = [ q ( t ) q . ( t ) M . ( t ) ] = [ q ( 1 ) q ( v ) m 11 1 + + m 1 v v m v 1 1 + + m vv v m 11 m v 1 m 1 v m vv ] ( 3.12 - 14 )
  • Process for Determining Hessian Rank of Dynamic Lagrangian
  • Information for determining Hessian rank of dynamic Lagrangian is available elsewhere herein.
  • Converting the Lagrangian to the Hamiltonian Via the Legendre transformation.
  • In our formulation the Lagrangian, Lk (T)(q, {dot over (q)}; ω), may be converted to the Hamiltonian using the Legendre transformation, so that
  • H k ( T ) ( q , p ; ω ) = L k ( T ) q . q . - L k ( T ) ( q , q . ; ω ) = p T q . - L k ( T ) ( q , q . ; ω ) ( 3.12 - 15 )
  • Pareto Multi-Criteria Optimization Engine (PMOE)
  • Consider the problem of determining the relaxed Pareto optimal solution to a given system query at a given time step. There are N decision elements, k=1, . . . , N. A given decision element, DEk, has the following associated parameters which are constituent to the ARB:
      • A generalized set of coordinates relevant to DEk, q.
      • A generalized set of linearly independent momenta {pa} where the index a refers the linearly independent momenta selected from the canonical set p.
      • A set of control parameters co for hard a soft rules of the system, where 0≦ωi≦1.
  • The ARB has the following components which determine the constraints of DEk:
      • The Hamiltonian which identifies the fundamental dynamics of the system of the system for the k'th decision element denoted

  • Hk (o)(q,{pa})  (3.13-1)
      • The summation of the first class constraints of the system, which is
  • i ω i f i ( q ( ) , ω i ) ( 3.13 - 2 )
      • The summation of the second class constraints of the system which is
  • i g i ( q ( ) , ω i ) ( 3.13 - 3 )
      • The Tellegen agent which is a function of the Hamiltonians of the absolute rules of the other N−1 decision elements in the system

  • H k (A) =F k (A)(H 1 (T) , . . . ,H k−1 (T) ,H k+1 (T) , . . . ,H K (T))  (3.13-4)
      • The total Hamiltonian of the system is denoted H(T).
      • Approximations to the various Hamiltonian's are denoted Ĥk (A), Ĥ(T) and Ĥk (o) for the Tellegen, total, and DE-level Hamiltonians respectively.
  • System Initialization
  • Determining the relaxed Pareto optimal point of the system is a process which includes:
      • Initialization of N decision elements.
      • Synchronization through companionship of each of the N decision elements with its respective Tellegen agent.
  • System Operation
  • Illustration SS shows how decision elements interact with the network, receive queries, and return results. In this example, the distributed system effectively implements an abstract classifier that has no real implementation. The DE's receive sensor data from the network which includes new available information which may benefit classification. The user submits a query that is received by a DE which then returns a result.
  • Gauge Systems in a Hamiltonian Domain
  • The time integral of the Lagrangian L(q, {dot over (q)}) is the action SL defined as

  • S L=∫t 1 t 2 L(q,{dot over (q)})dt
  • where
  • q . = q ( t ) t .
  • The Lagrangian conditions for stationarity are first that
  • t L q . ( n ) - L q ( n ) = 0 ( 3.14 - 1 )
  • where n=1, . . . , N,
  • L q . ( n ) = L q . ( n ) , and L q ( n ) = L q ( n ) .
  • And, secondarily
  • [ n = 1 N q ¨ ( n ) ] L q . ( n ) q . ( n ) = L q ( n ) - q . ( n ) L q . ( n ) q ( n ) ( 3.14 - 2 )
  • where
  • q ¨ ( n ) = 2 q ( n ) t 2 and L q . ( n ) q ( n ) = 2 L ( q . ( n ) ) 2 .
  • The generalized accelerations {umlaut over (q)}(n) are immediately determined if L{dot over (q)}(n){dot over (q)}(n) is invertible, or equivalently

  • det(L {dot over (q)}(n){dot over (q)}(n))≠0  (3.14-3)
  • for i=1, . . . , N. If for some n, det(L{dot over (q)}(n){dot over (q)}(n))=0, the acceleration vector {umlaut over (q)}(n) will not be uniquely determined.
  • The departing point for the Hamiltonian approach is the definition of conjugate momentum

  • p n =L {dot over (q)}(n)  (3.14-4)
  • where n=1, . . . , N. We will see that (3.14-3) is the condition of non-invertibility of
  • L q . q . = [ L q . ( 1 ) q . ( 1 ) L q . ( n ) q . ( N ) L q . ( N ) q . ( 1 ) L q . ( N ) q . ( N ) ]
  • of the velocities of the functions of the coordinates q and momenta p. In other words, in this case, the momenta defined in (3.14-4) are not all independent. Define the relations that follow from (3.14-4) as

  • φm(q,p)  (3.14-5)
  • where m=1, . . . , M. Write (3.14-4) in vector notation as

  • p=L {dot over (q)}(q,{dot over (q)}).
  • Then compatibility demands

  • φm(q,L {dot over (q)}(q,{dot over (q)}))=0
  • is an identity with m=1, . . . , M.
  • Relations specified in (3.14-5) are called primary constraints. For simplicity let's assume that rank(L{dot over (q)}{dot over (q)}) is constant throughout the phase space, (q, {dot over (q)}), so that (3.14-5) defines a submanifold smoothly embedded in the phase space. This manifold is known as the primary constraint surface. Let

  • rank(L {dot over (q)}{dot over (q)})=N−M′  (3.14-6)
  • Then there are M′ independent constraints among (3.14-5) and the primary constraint surface is a phase space submanifold of dimension 2N−M′.
  • We do not assume that all the constraints are linearly independent so that

  • M′≦M.  (3.14-7)
  • It follows from (3.14-5) that the inverse transformation from the p's to the q's is multivalued. That is, given q, p that satisfies (3.14-5), the inverse image (q, that satisfies
  • p = ( L q . ) T ( 3.14 - 8 )
  • is not unique, since (3.14-8) defines a map from a 2N-dimensional manifold (q, {dot over (q)}) to the smaller (2N−M′)-dimensional manifold. Thus the inverse image of the points of (3.14-5) form a manifold of dimension M′.
  • Conditions on the Constraint Function
  • There exist many equivalent ways to represent a given surface by means of equations of the form of (3.14-5). For example the surface p1=0 can be represented equivalently by p1 2=0, √{square root over (|p1|)}=0, or redundantly by p1=0 and p1 2=0. To use the Hamiltonian formalism, it is necessary to impose some restrictions which the regularity conditions for the constraints.
  • Regularity Conditions
  • The (2N−M′)-dimensional constraint surface φm(q, p) should be covered of open region: in each region the constraints can be split into independent constraints

  • m′ |m′=1, . . . ,M′}.
  • Their Jacobian matrix
  • { φ m p n , q ( n ) } = [ φ 1 p 1 , q ( 1 ) φ 1 p n , q ( n ) φ m p 1 , q ( 1 ) φ m p n , q ( n ) ]
  • with m′=1, . . . , M′ and n=1, . . . , N, is of rank M′.
  • The dependent constraints φm, m=M′+1, . . . , M of the other φm′=0
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00030
    φm=0. Alternatively the condition on the Jacobian.
    • 1. The function φm′ can be taken locally as the first M′ coordinates of a new regular system in the vicinity of the constraint surface or the differentials dφ1, . . . , dφM′ are locally linearly independent:

  • 1
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    . . .
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00018
    M′≠0  (3.14-9)
    • 2. The variations δφm′ are of order ε for arbitrary variations δq(i), δpi of order ε (Dirac's approach).
  • Theorem 3.14.1. If a smooth, phase space function G vanishes on {φm=0} then
  • G = m = 1 M g ( m ) φ m ( 3.14 - 10 )
  • Proof: (local proof). Set φm′, m′=1, . . . , M′ as coordinates (ym′,xα) with ym′m′. In these coordinates G(0, x)=0 and
  • G ( y , x ) = 0 1 t G ( ty , x ) t m = 1 M y m 0 1 y m G ( ty , x ) t m = 1 M g ( m ) ( y , x ) φ m ( y , x ) ( 3.14 - 11 ) with g ( m ) ( y , x ) = 0 1 y m G ( ty , x ) t .
  • Theorem 3.14.2. If the sum Σ(λ(n)δq(n)nδpn)=0 for arbitrary variations δq(i), δpi tangent to the constraint surface {φm(q, p)=0|m=1, . . . , M}, then
  • λ ( n ) = m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m q ( n ) ( 3.14 - 12 ) λ n = m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m q n ( 3.14 - 13 )
  • Proof. The dimension of {φm} is 2N-M′. Thus the variations at a point (p, q) forms a 2N-M′ dimensional space
  • n = 1 N ( λ ( n ) δ q ( n ) + μ n δ p n ) = 0 ( 3.14 - 14 )
  • By the singularity assumption, there exists exactly M′ solutions to (3.14-14). Clearly, the gradients
  • { φ m q ( n ) } and { φ m p n }
  • are linearly independent. They are the basis for solutions to (3.14-14).
  • Note that in the presence of redundant constraints, the functions u(m) exist but are not unique.
  • Canonical Hamiltonian
  • The Hamiltonian in canonical coordinates is
  • H ( q , p ) = n = 1 N q . ( n ) p n - L ( q , q . ) ( 3.14 - 15 )
  • The rate {dot over (q)} enters through the combination through conjugate momenta defined for each coordinate

  • p n(q,{dot over (q)})=L {dot over (q)} (n) (q,{dot over (q)})  (3.14-16)
  • This remarkable property is essential for the Hamiltonian approach. It is verified by evaluating the change 6H involved by arbitrary independent variations of position and velocities.
  • δ H = n = 1 N ( q . ( n ) δ p n + δ q . ( n ) p n ) - δ L = n = 1 N ( q . ( n ) δ p n + δ q . ( n ) p n ) - n = 1 N ( L q ( n ) δ q ( n ) + L q . ( n ) δ q . ( n ) ) ( 3.14 - 17 )
  • Utilizing (3.14-16) in (3.14-17) yields
  • δ H = n = 1 N ( q . ( n ) δ p n - L q ( n ) δ q ( n ) ) ( 3.14 - 18 )
  • The Hamiltonian defined by (3.14-15) is not unique as a function of p, q. This can be inferred from (3.14-18) by noticing that {δpn|n=1, . . . , N} are not all independent. They are restricted to preserve the primary constraints φm≈0 which are identities when the p's are expressed as functions of q's via (3.14-16).
  • Using the definition of the differential in several variables applied to δH=δH({q(n)}, {pn}), (3.14-18) can be rewritten
  • n = 1 N ( H q ( n ) δ q ( n ) + H p n δ p n ) = n = 1 N ( q . ( n ) δ p n - δ q ( n ) L q ( n ) ) or n = 1 N ( H q ( n ) + H q ( n ) ) δ q ( n ) + n = 1 N ( H p n - q . ( n ) ) δ p n = 0 ( 3.14 - 19 )
  • From theorem 2 we then conclude for each n that.
  • H q ( n ) + L q ( n ) = m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m q ( n ) and H p n - q . ( n ) = m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m p n . ( 3.14 - 20 )
  • So for each n:
  • q . ( n ) = H p n + m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m p n , n = 1 , , N and ( 3.14 - 21 ) - L q ( n ) = H q ( n ) + m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m q ( n ) , n = 1 , , N . ( 3.14 - 22 )
  • Note that if the constraints are independent, the vectors
  • n = 1 N φ m p n ,
  • m=1, . . . , M are also independent because of the regularity conditions (this is proved later). Hence no two sets of {u(m)|m=1, . . . , M} can yield the same velocities via (3.14-21).
  • Thus, using
  • q . ( n ) = H p n + m = 1 M u ( m ) ( q , q . ) φ m p n ( q , p ( q , q . ) )
  • we can find u(m)(p,{dot over (q)}). If we define the transformation from (q,{dot over (q)}) to the manifold {φm(q, p)=0|m=1, . . . , M}, from q, {dot over (q)}, u→q, p, u by

  • q=q, n=1, . . . ,N

  • p n =L q (n) (q,{dot over (q)}), n=1, . . . ,N−M′

  • u (m) =u (m)(q,{dot over (q)}), m=1, . . . ,M′
  • We see that this transformation is invertible since one has from q, p, u→q, {dot over (q)}, u
  • q = q q . ( n ) = H p n + m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m p n φ n ( q , p ) = 0
  • Thus invertibility of the Legendre transformation when

  • det(L {dot over (q)}{dot over (q)})=0
  • can be regained at the prices of adding extra variables.
  • Action Principle of the Hamiltonian Form
  • With (3.14-21) and (3.14-22) we can rewrite (3.14-1) in the equivalent Hamiltonian form
  • q . ( n ) = H p n + m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m p n p . n = - H p n - m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m p n φ m ( q , p ) = 0 , m = 1 , , M ( 3.14 - 23 )
  • The Hamiltonian Equations (3.14-23) can be derived from the following variational principle:
  • δ t 1 t 2 [ n = 1 N q ( n ) p n - H - m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m ] = 0 ( 3.14 - 24 )
  • for arbitrary variations of δq(n), δpn, and δu(m) subject to

  • δq(t 1)=δq(t 2)=0
  • where the u(m) appear now as Lagrange multipliers enforcing the primary constraints

  • φm(q,p)=0, m=1, . . . ,M.
  • Let F(p, q) be an arbitrary function of the canonical variables, then
  • F t = n = 1 N F q ( n ) q . n + n = 1 N F p n p . n = n = 1 N F q ( n ) [ H p n + m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m p n ] + n = 1 N F p n [ - H p n - m = 1 M u ( m ) φ m p n ] = [ F , H ] + m = 1 M u ( m ) [ F , φ m ] ( 3.14 - 25 )
  • The equation (3.14-25) introduces the new binary operator [•,•] which is the Poisson bracket and has the form
  • [ F , G ] = n = 1 N [ F q ( n ) G p n + F p n G q ( n ) ] = n = 1 N [ F q ( n ) G p n + F p n G q ( n ) ] ( 3.14 - 26 )
  • Secondary Constraints
  • The basic consistency condition is that the primary constraints be preserved in time. So for

  • F(p,q)=φm(q,p)
  • we should have that {dot over (φ)}m=0. {φm(q, p)=0}. So this means
  • [ φ m , H ] + m = 1 M u ( m ) [ φ m , φ m ] = 0 ( 3.14 - 27 )
  • This equation can either reduce to a relation independent of the u(m′), or, it may impose a restriction on the u's.

  • U=−{[φ mm′]}[φm ,H](q,p)  (3.14-28)
  • In the case (3.14-27) is independent of the u's (3.14-27) is called a secondary constraint. The fundamental difference of secondary constraints with respect to primary constraints is that primary constraints is that primary constraints are the consequence of the definition (3.14-8) while secondary constraints depend on the dynamics.
  • If X(q, p)=0 is an external constraint, we most impose a compatibility condition
  • [ X , H ] + m = 1 M u ( m ) [ X , φ m ] = 0 ( 3.14 - 29 )
  • Next we need to test whether this constraint:
  • Φ ( p , q ) = [ X , H ] + m = 1 M u ( m ) [ X , φ m ] = 0 ( 3.14 - 30 ) ? ? indicates text missing or illegible when filed ( 3.14 - 31 )
  • Implies new secondary constraints or whether it only restricts the u's. After the process is finished we are left with a number of secondary constraints which will be denoted by

  • φk=0, k=M+1, . . . ,M+K
  • Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00999

    where K is the total number of secondary constraints. In general, it will be useful to denote all the constraints (primary and secondary) in a uniform way as

  • φj(q,p)=0, j=1, . . . ,M+K=J  (3.14-32)
  • We make the same regularity assumptions on the full set of constraints.
  • Weak and Strong Equations
  • Equation (3.14-32) can be written as

  • φj(•)≈0  (3.14-33)
  • To emphasize, the quantity φj is numerically restricted to be zero but does not vanish throughout the space. What this is means is that φj has non-zero Poisson brackets with the canonical variables.
  • Let F, G be functions that coincide on the manifold {φj≈0|j=1, . . . , J} are said the be weakly equal and denoted by F≈G. On the other hand, an equation that holds throughout the entire phase space and not just on the submanifold {φj≈0} is called strong. Hence, by theorem 1
  • F G F - G = j = 1 J c ( j ) ( p , q ) φ j ( 3.14 - 34 )
  • Restrictions on the Lagrange Multipliers
  • Assume that we have found a complete set of constraints
  • { φ j 0 | j = 1 , , J } ( 3.14 - 35 ) [ φ j , H ] + m = 1 M u ( m ) [ φ j , φ m ] 0 ( 3.14 - 36 )
  • We consider (3.14-36) as a set of non-homogeneous linear equations with M≦J unknowns with coefficients that are functions of the q's and p's.
  • The general solution of (3.14-36) for each j is of the form

  • u (m) =U (m) +V (m) , m=1, . . . ,M  (3.14-37)
  • with V(m) the solution of the homogeneous equation
  • m = 1 M V ( m ) [ φ j , φ m ] 0 ( 3.14 - 38 )
  • The most general solution of (3.14-38) is a linear combination of linearly independent solutions of Vα (m) where α=1, . . . , A with A≦M. Under the assumption that the matrix
  • [ [ φ 1 , φ 1 ] [ φ 1 , φ M ] [ φ J , φ 1 ] [ φ J , φ M ] ] ( 3.14 - 39 )
  • is of constant rank, the number of independent solutions A is the same for all p, q. Thus the general solution to (3.14-36) can be written as
  • u ( m ) U ( m ) + α = 1 A v ( α ) V α ( m ) , m = 1 , , M ( 3.14 - 40 )
  • Irreducible and Reducible Cases
  • If the equations {φj=0|j=1, . . . , J} are not independent, one says that the constraints are reducible. The system is irreducible when the constraints are independent. However the separation of constraints into dependent and independent ones might be difficult to perform. It also may disturb invariance properties under some important symmetry. In some cases it may be impossible to separate irreducible from irreducible contexts. Reducible cases arise for example when the dynamical coordinates include p-form gauge fields.
  • Any irreducible set of constraints can always be replaced by a reducible set by introducing constraints of the ones already at hand. The formalism should be invariant under such replacements.
  • Total Hamiltonian
  • We now discuss details of the dynamic equation (3.14-25)
  • F . [ F , H + α = 1 A v ( α ) φ α ] ( 3.14 - 41 )
  • where from (3.14-40)
  • H = H + m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m and φ α = m = 1 M V α ( m ) φ m , α = 1 , , A ( 3.14 - 42 )
  • This is the result of theorem 3 (see below).
  • Theorem 3.
  • [ F , m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m ] m = 1 M U ( m ) [ F , φ m ] ( 3.14 - 43 ) [ F , α = 1 A V α ( m ) φ m ] α = 1 A V α ( m ) [ F , φ m ] ( 3.14 - 44 ) [ F , m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m ] = i = 1 N { F q ( i ) p i m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m - F p i q ( i ) m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m } = i = 1 N { F q ( i ) [ m = 1 M U ( m ) p i φ m + m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m p i ] } - i = 1 N { F p i [ m = 1 M U ( m ) q ( i ) φ m + m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m q ( i ) ] } = m = 1 M { [ F , U ( m ) ] φ m + U ( m ) [ F , φ m ] } So [ F , m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m ] - m = 1 M U ( m ) [ F , φ m ] = m = 1 M [ F , U ( m ) ] φ m ( 3.14 - 45 )
  • Proof.
  • and from (3.14-34) in (3.14-45), (3.14-43) follows. By a similar process we show (3.14-44). We now prove the validity of (3.14-41).
  • Theorem 4. Let F(q,p) be a regular function, then F(p,q) propagates in time according to the approximate equation (3.14-41).
  • Proof. From (3.14-25),
  • F t = [ F , H ] + m = 1 M u ( m ) [ F , φ m ] . ( 3.14 - 46 )
  • From (3.14-40) into (3.14-46) we obtain,
  • F t [ F , H ] + m = 1 M { U ( m ) + α = 1 A v ( α ) V α ( m ) } [ F , φ m ] or F t [ F , H ] + m = 1 M U ( m ) [ F , φ m ] + m = 1 M α = 1 A v ( α ) V α ( m ) [ F , φ m ] ( 3.14 - 47 )
  • Thus from (3.14-43) and (3.14-44) of theorem 3, we get
  • F t [ F , H ] + m = 1 M [ F , U ( m ) φ m ] + α = 1 A v ( α ) [ F , m = 1 M V α ( m ) φ m ] [ F , H + m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m + α = 1 A v ( α ) m = 1 M V α ( m ) φ m ] [ F , H + m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m + α = 1 A v ( α ) φ α ] ( 3.14 - 48 ) with H = H + m = 1 M U ( m ) φ m ( 3.14 - 49 ) φ α = m = 1 M V α ( m ) φ m ( 3.14 - 50 )
  • Now define
  • H T = H + α = 1 A V ( α ) φ α . ( 3.14 - 51 )
  • So we obtain
  • F t [ F , H T ] ( 3.14 - 52 )
  • First and Second Class Functions
  • The distinction between primary and secondary constraints is of little importance.
  • We now consider a fundamental classification. It depends on the concept of first class and second class functions.
  • Definition 1. A function F(q, p) is said to be first class if its Poisson bracket with every constraint vanishes weakly, [F,φj]≈0, j=1, . . . , J. A function of the canonical variables that is not first class is called second class. Thus F is second class if [F, φk]≈0 for at least one k, k=1, . . . , M.
  • Theorem 5. If F and G are first class functions, then their Poisson bracket is also a first class function.
  • Proof: By Hypothesis,
  • [ F , φ j ] = k = 1 M f j ( k ) φ k ( 3.14 - 53 ) [ G , φ j ] = l = 1 M g j ( l ) φ l ( 3.14 - 54 )
  • Applying the Jacobi identity, we get
  • [ [ F , G ] , φ j ] = [ F , [ G , φ j ] ] - [ G , [ F , φ j ] ] = [ F , l = 1 M g j ( l ) φ l ] - [ G , k = 1 M f j ( k ) φ k ] = i { F q ( i ) p i l = 1 M g j ( l ) φ l - F p i q ( i ) l = 1 M g j ( l ) φ l } - n { G q ( n ) p n k = 1 M f j ( k ) φ k - G p n q ( n ) k = 1 M f j ( k ) φ k } = i { F q ( i ) l = 1 M { g j ( l ) p i φ l + g j ( l ) φ l p i } - F p i l = 1 M { g j ( l ) q ( i ) φ l + g j ( l ) φ l q ( i ) } } - n { G q ( n ) k = 1 M { f j ( k ) p n φ k + f j ( k ) φ k p n } - G p n k = 1 M { f j ( k ) q ( n ) φ k + f j ( k ) φ k q ( n ) } } = l = 1 M { φ l i { F q ( i ) g j ( l ) p i - F p i g j ( l ) q ( i ) } + g j ( l ) i { F q ( i ) φ l q ( i ) - F p i φ l p i } } - k = 1 M { φ k n { G q ( n ) f j ( k ) p n - G p n f j ( k ) q ( n ) } + f j ( k ) n { G q ( n ) φ k p n - G p n φ k q ( n ) } } = l = 1 M { φ l [ F , g j ( l ) ] + g j ( l ) [ F , φ l ] } - k = 1 M { φ k [ G , f j ( k ) ] + f j ( k ) [ G , φ k ] } = l = 1 M [ F , g j ( l ) ] φ l - k = 1 M [ G , f j ( k ) ] φ k + l = 1 M { l = 1 M g j ( l ) f l ( l ) } φ l - k = 1 M { k = 1 M f j ( k ) g k k } φ k 0
  • We now use theorem 5 to show the following.
  • Theorem 6. H′ defined by (3.14-49) and φα defined by (3.14-50) are first class functions.
  • Proof: This follows directly from (3.14-36) and (3.14-38).
  • We learn from theorem 6 that the total Hamiltonian defined by (3.14-51) is the sum of the first class Hamiltonian H′ and the first class primary constraints φα multiplied by arbitrary coefficients.
  • First Class Constraints as Generators of Gauge Transformations
  • Gauge transformations are transformations that do not change the physical state.
  • The presence of arbitrary functions of time v(α), α=1, . . . , A in the total Hamiltonian, HT (see (3.14-51)) imply that not all the q's and p's are observable given a set of q's and p's where the state of the physical system is uniquely determined. However the converse is not true: there is more than one set of values of the canonical variables that defines a state. To illustrate this, we see that if we give an initial set of values of physical state at time t, we expect the equations of motion to fully determine the state at other times. Thus any ambiguity in the value of the canonical variables at t2≠t1 should be irrelevant from the physical point of view.
  • A Derivation Example
  • We propose here an alternate formulation of Dirac's formalism.
  • Primary Constraints
  • Recall that the momenta, canonically conjugate to the generalized “coordinates” q(j), j=1, . . . , N is given by
  • p j = L ( q , q . ) q . ( j ) , j = 1 , , N . ( E -- 1 )
  • For non-singular systems the equations allows us to express {dot over (q)}(j), j=1, . . . , N in terms of the canonical variables,

  • {dot over (q)} (i) =f i(q,p), i=1, . . . ,N  (E--2)
  • By performing a Legendre transformation
  • H c ( p , q ) = i = 1 N p i f ( q , p ) + L ( q , f ( p , q ) )
  • We obtain the Hamiltonian of the system Hc. And from this function we obtain the standard equations of motion of the system.
  • q . = H c p p . = - H c q ( E -- 3 )
  • For (E--2) to be well-defined we need to have the Hessian W of satisfy

  • det W≠0  (E--4)
  • In this case the accelerations {umlaut over (q)}(i) are uniquely determined by the q(j) and {dot over (q)}(i).
  • When det W≠0, the Hamiltonian equations of motion do not take the standard form, and we speak of a singular Lagrangian. For illustration purposes, consider a Lagrangian of the form
  • L ( q , q . ) = 1 2 i = 1 N j = 1 N W ij ( q ) q . ( i ) q . ( j ) + i = 1 N η i ( q ) q . ( i ) - V ( q ) ( E -- 5 )
  • with W a symmetric matrix. From (E--1), the canonical momentum for (E--5) is given by
  • p i = 1 2 j = 1 N W ij ( q ) q . ( j ) + η i ( q ) , i = 1 , , n . ( E -- 6 )
  • If W is singular of rank RW, then it possesses N—RW eigenvectors with corresponding zero eigenvalues. Then for eigenvectors vj (α)
  • j = 1 N W ij ( q ) v j ( α ) ( q ) = 0 , α = 1 , , N - R W
  • So pre-multiplying (E--6) by vj (α) and summing over i we get
  • i = 1 N v i ( α ) ( q ) p i = i = 1 N [ j = 1 N ( v i ( α ) ( q ) W ij ( q ) q . ( j ) ) + v i ( α ) ( q ) η i ( q ) ] = i = 1 N ν i ( α ) ( q ) η i ( q ) , α = 1 , , N - R W So i = 1 N v i ( α ) ( q ) ( p i - η i ( q ) ) = 0 , α = 1 , , N - R W . ( E -- 7 )
  • Let {pα}, α=1, . . . , N—RW, denote the linearly dependent elements of p. Let {pα}, a=1, . . . , Ra be the momenta satisfying (E--1). Then the constraint equations are of the form
  • β = 1 N - R W N αβ ( q ) p β - F α ( q , { p a } ) = 0 , α = 1 , , N - R W M αβ ( q ) = v β ( α ) and ( E -- 8 ) F α ( q , { p β } ) = i = 1 N v i ( α ) ( q ) η i ( q ) + b = 1 R W v b ( α ) ( q ) p b ( E -- 9 )
  • The matrix {Mαβ} is necessarily invertible because otherwise M would possess eigenvectors with zero eigenvalues, implying existence of additional constraints.
  • Note that (E--8) can be written as
  • p α - g α ( q , { p a } ) = 0 , α = 1 , , N - R W with g α ( q , { p a } ) = β = 1 N - R W M αβ - 1 F β ( q , { p a } ) ( E -- 10 )
  • with dim{pa}=RW. So we can define,

  • φα(q,p)=p α −g α(q,{p a})=0, α=1, . . . ,N—R W  (E--11)
  • In Dirac's terminology, constraints of the form of (E--11) are referred to as primary constraints. Although the derivation above is based on a Lagrangian, quadratic in the velocity terms, it is generally valid for Lagrangians which depend on q and {dot over (q)} but not on higher derivatives.
  • Note: Primary constraints follow exclusively from the definition of canonical momenta.
  • The derivation above is valid for general Lagrangians and their Hessian. Let's assume {Wij(q, {dot over (a)})} is the Hessian of a given Lagrangian L. Let {Wab|a, b=1, . . . , RW} be the largest sub-matrix of {Wij} with suitable rearrangement if necessary. We then solve (E--1) for RW velocities {dot over (q)}(a) in terms of {q(i)|i=1, . . . , n}, {pa|a=1, . . . RW} and {q(α)|α=1, . . . , N−RW}. That is

  • {dot over (q)} (a) =f a(q,{p b },{{dot over (a)} (β)})  (E--12)
  • with a, b=1, . . . , RW and β=RW+1, . . . , N.
  • Inserting these relations into (E--1), we get relations of the form

  • p j =h j(q,{p a },{{dot over (q)} (α)})  (E--13)
  • with a, j=1, . . . , RW and α=RW+1, . . . , N. This relation reduces to an identity by construction. The remaining equations are of the form

  • p α =h α(q,{p a },{{dot over (q)} (β)})  (E--14)
  • with α=1, . . . , N−RW. However, the right hand side cannot depend on {{dot over (q)}(β)} since otherwise we could express more velocities in terms of the momenta of the coordinates of the momenta and the remaining velocities.
  • Hamiltonian Equations of Motion for Constrained Systems
  • Theorem 3.16.1. In the space Γp define by Γp={φα(p, q)|α=1, . . . , N−RW} where φα is defined as (E--11). The Hamiltonian is only a function of {q(i)|i=1, . . . , N} and momenta {pa|a=1, . . . , RW} and does not depend on {{dot over (q)}(α)|α=1, . . . , N−RW}
  • Proof. On Γp the Hamiltonian is given by
  • H o = H c | Γ p = a = 1 R W p a f a - α = 1 N - R W g α q . ( α ) - L ( q , { f b } , { q . ( β ) } ) ( E -- 15 )
  • where fa, a=1, . . . , N−RW is given by (E--12) and gα, α=1, . . . , RW is given by (E--10). We want to show that Ho does not depend on {dot over (q)}(β), β=1, . . . , N−RW. We compute
  • ( E -- 16 ) H o q . ( β ) = a = 1 R W p a f a q . ( β ) - g β - a = 1 R W L q . ( a ) | q . ( a ) = f a f a q . ( β ) - L q . ( β ) | q . ( a ) = f a = α = 1 R w ( p α - L q . ( α ) | q . ( α ) = f α ) f α q . ( β ) - g β - L q . ( β ) | q . ( α ) = f α
  • Since by definition
  • p a = L q . ( a ) , a = 1 , , R W
  • And from (E--11)
  • g β = p β = L q . ( β ) q . a = f a . So H o q . ( β ) = 0 , β = 1 , , N - R W . ( E - 17 )
  • and therefore

  • H o(q,{p a },{{dot over (q)} (a)})=H o(q,{p a}).
  • Theorem 3.16.2. In the presence of primary constraints (E--11), the Hamilton equations of motion are given by
  • q . ( i ) = H o p i + β = 1 N q . ( β ) φ β p i , i = 1 , , N p . i = - H o q ( i ) + β = 1 n q . ( β ) φ β q ( i ) , i = 1 , , N φ α ( p , q ) = 0 , α = 1 , , N - R W ( E - 18 )
  • where {dot over (q)}(β) are a priori underdetermined velocities.
  • Proof: From (E--15) we obtain and the application of Theorem 3.16.1
  • H o p a = f a + b = 1 R W p b f b p a + β = 1 N - R W g β p a q . ( β ) - b = 1 R W L q . ( b ) f b p a = q . ( a ) + b = 1 R W ( p b - L q . ( b ) ) f b p a + β = 1 N - R W g β p a q . ( β ) = q . ( a ) + β = 1 N - R W g β p a q . ( β ) ( E - 19 )
  • with a=1, . . . , n−RW. Further
  • H o q ( i ) = b = 1 R W p b f b q ( i ) + β = 1 N - R W q . ( β ) g β q ( i ) - L q ( i ) q . a = f a - b = 1 R W L q . b q . b = f b f b q ( i ) = b = 1 R W ( p b - L q . ( b ) q . ( b ) = f b ) f b q ( i ) + β = 1 N - R W q . ( β ) g β q ( i ) - L q ( i ) q . ( a ) = f a = β = 1 N - R W q . ( β ) g β q ( i ) - L q ( i ) q . ( a ) = f a = β = 1 N - R W q . ( β ) g β q ( i ) - t ( L q . ( i ) ) q . ( a ) = f a ( E - 20 )
  • from (add reference).
  • H o q ( i ) = - p . i + β = 1 N - R W q . ( β ) g β q ( i ) ( E - 21 )
  • From (E--19) and (E--20) we get:
  • q . ( a ) = H o p a - β = 1 N - R W g β p a q . ( β ) , a = 1 , , R W p . i = - H o q ( i ) + β = 1 n - R W q . ( β ) g β q ( i ) , i = 1 , , N ( E - 22 )
  • Since
  • H o p a = 0 and φ β p a = δβ α
  • we can supplement these equations with
  • q . ( α ) = H o p α - β = 1 N - R W g β p α q . ( β ) , α = 1 , , N - R W ( E - 23 )
  • So we can write
  • q . ( i ) = H o p i + β = 1 N - R W g β p i q . ( β ) , i = 1 , , N p . i = - H o q ( i ) - β = 1 N - R W q . ( β ) g β q ( i ) , i = 1 , , N ( E - 24 )
  • For consistency with (E--11) we should write
  • q . ( α ) = t - g α ( q , { p a } ) , α = 1 , , N - R W ( E - 25 )
  • where {dot over (p)}α is given by the right hand side of (E--22).
  • Streamlining the Hamiltonian Equation of Motion (EOM)
  • Definition 3.16-1. A function f is weakly equal to g denoted by f≈g, if f and g are equal on the subspace defined by the primary constraints,

  • φβ=0 when f|Γ p =g| Γ p

  • and

  • f(q,p)≈g(q,p)
    Figure US20150370228A1-20151224-P00036
    f(q,p)=g(q,p) when {φα(q,p)=0}
  • Theorem 3.16.3. Assume f, g are defined over the entire space spanned by {q(i)}, {pi}. Then if
  • f ( q , p ) Γ p = g ( q , p ) Γ p Then q ( i ) ( f - β φ β f p β ) q ( i ) ( h - β φ β h p β ) and ( E - 26 ) p i ( f - β φ β f p β ) p ( h - β φ β h p β ) ( E - 27 )
  • for i=1, . . . N.
  • Proof: Consider the two functions f(q, {pa}, {pβ}) and h(q, {pa}, {pβ}). Using (E--11) and from the hypothesis of the theorem,

  • f(q,{p a },{g α})=h(q,{p a },{g α})  (E--28)
  • Thus is follows
  • ( f q ( i ) + a f p a p a q ( i ) + β f p β g β q ( i ) ) Γ p = ( h q ( i ) + a h p a p a q ( i ) + β h p β g β q ( i ) ) Γ p and ( E - 29 ) ( f p i + a i f p a p a p i + β f p β g β p i ) Γ β = ( h p i + a i h p a p a p i + β h p β g β p i ) Γ p ( E - 30 )
  • Note since φα(q,p)=pα−gα(q,{pa}), we have
  • g β q ( i ) = - φ β ( q , p ) q ( i ) and g β p i = φ β ( q , p ) p i and φ α ( q , p ) = 0
  • for α=1, . . . , N−RW. We have
  • ( f q ( i ) - β f p β φ β q ( i ) ) Γ p = ( h q ( i ) - β h p β φ β q ( i ) ) Γ β
  • which can be written as
  • q ( i ) ( f - β φ β f p β ) q ( i ) ( h - β φ β h p β )
  • since φβ 2 f/∂pβ 2=0 because φβ=0. Similarly,
  • p i ( f - β φ β f p β ) p i ( h - β φ β h p β )
  • Corrolary 3.16-1.
  • q . ( i ) = H p i + β v ( β ) φ β p i p . i = - H q ( i ) - β v ( β ) φ β q ( i )
  • for i=1, . . . , N.
  • Proof. We consider two Hamiltonians H({q(i)},{pi}) and Ho({q(i)},{pa}). Define H({q(i)},{pi}) as follows

  • H({(q (i) },{p i})≈H o({q (i) },{p a}).
  • Then using the result of Theorem 3.16.1, from (E--29) with f=H and h=Ho
  • H o q ( i ) q ( i ) ( H - β = 1 N - R w φ β H p β ) ( E - 31 ) H o p i p i ( H - β = 1 N - R w φ β H p β ) ( E - 32 )
  • Using (E--31) and (E--32) in (E--24), we get
  • q . ( i ) p i ( H - β φ β H p β ) + β q . ( β ) φ β p i ( E - 33 ) and p . i - q ( i ) ( H - β φ β H p β ) - β q . ( β ) φ β q ( i ) or q . ( i ) p i ( H - β φ β ( H p β - q . ( β ) ) ) and p . i - q ( i ) ( H - β φ β ( H p β - q . ( β ) ) ) Define v β q . ( β ) - H p β H T H + β v ( β ) φ β
  • So (E--33) becomes
  • q . ( i ) H T p i p . i - H T q ( i ) ( E - 34 )
  • Constrained Hamiltonian Systems
  • Local symmetries on a Lagrangian based model. Consider

  • q (i) →q (i)(t)+δq (i)(t)

  • {dot over (q)} (i) →{dot over (q)} (i)(t)+δ{dot over (q)} (i)(t)
  • with i=1, . . . , N. The action of the system is given by

  • S(q,{dot over (q)})=∫L(q,{dot over (q)})dt
  • where q and {dot over (q)} are n-dimensional column vectors. The action differential
  • δ S = L ( q + δ q , q . + δ q . ) t - L ( q , q . ) t = L ( q + δ q , q . + δ q . ) t - L ( q , q . ) t = [ i L q ( i ) δ q ( i ) + i L q . ( i ) δ q . ( i ) ] t = - i [ t L q . ( i ) - L q ( i ) ] δ q ( i ) t = - t i E i ( o ) ( q , q . , q ¨ ) δ q ( i )
  • where we define the Euler-Lagrange differential operator
  • E i ( o ) ( q , q . , q ¨ ) = t L q . ( i ) - L q ( i ) .
  • Note that
  • i = 1 N E i ( o ) ( q , q . , q ¨ ) δ q ( i ) t 0 ( 3.17 - 1 )
  • on shell. Expanding Ei (o)
  • E i ( o ) ( q , q . , q ¨ ) = j [ 2 L ( q , q . ) q . ( i ) q ¨ ( j ) q ¨ ( i ) + 2 L ( q , q . ) q . ( i ) q ( j ) q . ( i ) ] - L ( q , q . ) q ( i ) = j W ij ( q , q . ) q ¨ ( j ) + j 2 L ( q , q . ) q . ( i ) q ( j ) q . ( i ) - L ( q , q . ) q ( i ) = j W ij ( q , q . ) q ¨ ( j ) + k i ( q , q . )
  • If L is singular, W(N×N) is not invertible so (3.17-1) cannot be solved for {umlaut over (q)}i, =1, . . . , N. If Rank(W(q,{dot over (q)}))=RW on shell, then there exist N−RW in the theory. There exist N−RW independent left (or right) zero mode eigenvectors wi (o,k), i=1, . . . , N−RW such that
  • i w i ( o , k ) ( q , q . ) W ij ( q , q . ) = 0 , k = 1 , , N - R W Thus φ ( o , k ) = i = 1 N w i ( o , k ) ( q , q . ) E i ( o ) ( q , q . , q ¨ ) ( 3.17 - 2 )
  • depend on q and {dot over (q)} only. The φ(o,k) also vanish on shell:

  • φ(o,k)(q,{dot over (q)})=0, k=1, . . . ,N−R W
  • The set {φ(o,k)|k=1, . . . , N−RW} are the zero generation constraints. It is possible that not all the {φ(o,k)} are linearly independent. So we may find linear combinations of the zero mode eigenvectors
  • v i ( o , n o ) = k c k ( n o ) w i ( o , k )
  • such that we have

  • G (o,n o ) =v (o,n o ) E (o)≡0, n o , . . . ,N o  (3.17-3)
  • These are called gauge identities.
  • Any variation δqi, i=1, . . . , N, of the form
  • δ q i = n o ɛ n o v i ( o , n o )
  • Is action invariant by (3.17-1).
  • Given this definition of δqi and (3.17-3), we conclude
  • δ S = t i = 1 N E i ( o ) ( q , q . , q ¨ ) n o ɛ n o ( t ) v i ( o , n o ) = t i = 1 N ɛ n o n o E i ( o ) ( q , q . , q ¨ ) v i ( o , n o ) ( q , q . ) = t i = 1 N ɛ n o G ( o , n o ) 0
  • everywhere. The remaining zero generating modes which we denote by u(o,n 0 ) lead to genuine constraints. They are of the form φ(o,n o )(q,{dot over (q)})=0 on shell, where

  • φ(o,n o ) =u (o,n o ) E (o).  (3.17-4)
  • The algorithm now proceeds as follows. We separate the gauge identities (3.17-3) from the nontrivial constraints (3.17-4) and will list them separately. They will be used for determining local symmetry transformations.
  • Next we want to search for additional constraints. We do this by searching for further functions of the coordinates and velocities which vanish in the space of physical trajectories. To this effect consider the following N+No vector constructed from E(o) and the time derivative of the constraints (3.17-4)
  • [ E ( 1 ) ] = [ E ( o ) t ( u ( o , 1 ) E ( o ) ) t ( u ( o , n o ) E ( o ) ) ] = [ E ( o ) t φ ( o ) ] ( 3.17 - 5 )
  • by construction. The constraint φ(o) is valid for all time and therefore
  • t φ ( o ) = 0
  • on shell, but
  • φ ( o , i ) t = q . ( u ( o , i ) E ( o ) ) q ¨ + q ( u ( o , i ) E ( o ) ) q . So [ E i 1 ( 1 ) ] = j = 1 n W i 1 j ( 1 ) ( q , q . ) q . ( j ) + k i 1 ( 1 ) ( q , q . ) ( 3.17 - 6 )
  • where i1=1, . . . , N+No, and
  • [ W i 1 i ( 1 ) ] = [ W ( o ) q . ( u ( o , i ) E ( o ) ) q . ( u ( o , N o ) E ( o ) ) ] [ k i 1 ( 1 ) ] = [ k ( o ) i q ( j ) ( u ( o , i ) E ( o ) ) q . ( j ) i q ( j ) ( u ( o , N o ) E ( o ) ) q . ( j ) ] ( 3.17 - 7 )
  • We next look for the zero modes of W(1). By construction, these zero modes include the o modes of the previous level. The gauge identities at level 1 are.
  • G ( 1 , n 1 ) = v ( 1 , n 1 ) E 1 - n o = 1 N o M n 1 n o ( 1 , 0 ) ( u ( o , n o ) E ( o ) ) 0 ( 3.17 - 8 )
  • where n1=1, . . . , N1 and the genuine constraints are of the form

  • φ(1,n 1 )(1,n 1 ) E 1=0  (3.17-9)
  • with n1=1, . . . , N1 on shell.
  • We next adjoin the new identities (3.17-8) to the ones determined earlier (3.17-3) with the remaining constraints (3.17-9) we proceed as before, adjoining their time derivatives to (3.17-5) and construct Wi 1 i (1) and ki 1 (1).
  • The iterative process will terminate at some level M if either i) there is not further zero modes, or ii) the new constraints can be expressed as linear combinations of previous constraints.
  • The Maximal Set of Linearly Independent Gauge Identities Generated by the Algorithm
  • Note that the algorithm steps are of the form
  • G ( o , n o ) = u ( o , n o ) E ( o ) 0 ( 3.17 - 10 ) G ( l , n l ) = u ( l , n l ) E ( l ) - l = 0 l - 1 n l = 0 N l M n l n l ( l , l ) φ ( l , n l ) ( 3.17 - 11 )
  • with L=1, . . . , Nl. The Mn l n l′ (l,l′), are only functions of q and {dot over (q)}. And
  • φ ( l , n l ) = u ( l , n l ) E ( l ) , n 1 = 1 , , N l , ( 3.17 - 12 ) E ( l ) = [ E ( o ) φ ( o ) t φ ( l - 1 ) t ] ( 3.17 - 13 )
  • where φ(l) is a column vector with N1 components φ(l,n l ). Thus we conclude from (3.17-13) and (3.17-11) that the general form of the gauge identity given by (3.17-11) is of the form
  • G ( l , n l ) = i = 1 N l l = 1 M m = 1 l ς mi ( l , m l ) m t m E i ( o ) 0 ( 3.17 - 14 )
  • where δmi (l,m 1 )(q,{dot over (q)}) and Nl<M. From (3.17-14) it also follows that
  • l = 1 M n l = 1 l ɛ ( l , n l ) G ( l , n l ) 0 ( 3.17 - 15 )
  • This identity can also be written as
  • δ q ( i ) E i ( o ) - t F where δ q ( i ) = l = 1 M n l = 1 N l m = q l ( - 1 ) m m t m ς m ( l , n l ) ɛ ( l , m l ) ( t ) ( 3.17 - 16 )
  • and F is a complicated function of q and {dot over (q)}. By collecting indices l, nl together
  • δ q i = l = 1 M n l = 1 N l m = q l ( - 1 ) m ς m i ( a ) ɛ ( a ) ( t )
  • Example of Constrained Hamiltonian System in Lagrangian Form
  • Let
  • L ( q , q . ) = 1 2 q . 2 ( 1 ) + q . ( 1 ) q ( 2 ) + 1 2 ( q ( 1 ) - q ( 2 ) ) 2 ( 3.17 - 17 ) E ( o ) = [ t q . ( 1 ) - L q ( 1 ) t q . ( 2 ) - L q ( 2 ) ] = [ q ¨ ( 1 ) + 2 q ( 2 ) - q ( 1 ) q ( 1 ) - q ( 2 ) ] ( 3.17 - 18 ) W = [ 1 0 0 0 ] ( 3.17 - 19 ) k = [ q . ( 2 ) - q ( 1 ) + q ( 2 ) - q . ( 1 ) - q ( 2 ) + q ( 1 ) ] ( 3.17 - 20 )
  • The only o mode is
  • u ( o ) = [ 0 , 1 ] Then E ( o ) = W ( o ) q ¨ + k ( o ) = [ 1 0 0 0 ] [ q ¨ ( 1 ) q ¨ ( 2 ) ] + [ q . ( 2 ) - q ( 1 ) + q ( 2 ) - q . ( 1 ) - q ( 2 ) + q ( 1 ) ] Then u ( o ) E ( o ) = [ 0 1 ] [ [ 1 0 0 0 ] [ q ¨ ( 1 ) q ¨ ( 2 ) ] + [ q . ( 2 ) - q ( 1 ) + q ( 2 ) - q . ( 1 ) - q ( 2 ) + q ( 1 ) ] ] = - q . ( 1 ) - q ( 2 ) + q ( 1 ) = 0 ( 3.17 - 21 )
  • on shell. Then there are no gauge identities for E(o). Now construct E(1).
  • E ( 1 ) = [ E ( o ) t t u ( o ) E ( o ) ] = [ q . ( 2 ) - q ( 1 ) + q ( 2 ) - q . ( 1 ) - q ( 2 ) + q ( 1 ) - q ¨ ( 1 ) - q . ( 2 ) + q . ( 1 ) ]
  • which can be written
  • E ( 1 ) = W ( 1 ) q ¨ + k ( 1 ) = [ 0 0 0 0 - 1 0 ] [ q ¨ ( 1 ) q ¨ ( 2 ) ] + [ q . ( 2 ) - q ( 1 ) + q ( 2 ) - q . ( 1 ) - q ( 2 ) + q ( 1 ) - q ¨ ( 2 ) + q . ( 1 ) ]
  • There zero modes of w(1) are
  • W ( 1 ) { [ 0 1 0 ] [ 1 0 1 ]
  • The first zero mode is the previous one augmented by one dimension and reproduces the previous constraint. The second mode reproduces the negative of the constraint (3.17-21). That is,

  • v (1) E (1) =−u (o) E (o)
  • with v(1)=[1 0 1]. This leads to the gauge identity

  • G (1) =v (1) E (1) +u (o) E (o)≡0
  • Companionship: Reconciling Agents in the Network.
  • The outline of the companionship process is as follows for a system of N agents.
      • Determine the state action space of the system for N−1 agents to create a Tellegen decision element.
      • Update the remaining agent with the Tellegen DE.
      • Repeat process so that all N agents are updated with respect to their Tellegen DEs.
      • User submits query.
      • System used KB to establish equations of motion for system in Lagrangian or Hamiltonian form.
      • System determines optimal trajectory via optimization algorithm of the equations of motion that conform to the principle of least action.
      • System returns solution which is a point in the phase space and also serves as an answer to the query.
  • It will also be appreciated that in some embodiments the functionality provided by the routines discussed above may be provided in alternative ways, such as being split among more routines or consolidated into fewer routines. Similarly, in some embodiments illustrated routines may provide more or less functionality than is described, such as when other illustrated routines instead lack or include such functionality respectively, or when the amount of functionality that is provided is altered. In addition, while various operations may be illustrated as being performed in a particular manner (e.g., in serial or in parallel, synchronously or asynchronously, etc.) and/or in a particular order, those skilled in the art will appreciate that in other embodiments the operations may be performed in other orders and in other manners. Those skilled in the art will also appreciate that the data structures discussed above may be structured in different manners, such as by having a single data structure split into multiple data structures or by having multiple data structures consolidated into a single data structure. Similarly, in some embodiments illustrated data structures may store more or less information than is described, such as when other illustrated data structures instead lack or include such information respectively, or when the amount or types of information that is stored is altered.
  • From the foregoing it will be appreciated that, although specific embodiments have been described herein for purposes of illustration, various modifications may be made without deviating from the spirit and scope of the invention. Accordingly, the invention is not limited except as by the appended claims and the elements recited therein. In addition, while certain aspects of the invention are presented below in certain claim forms, the inventors contemplate the various aspects of the invention in any available claim form. For example, while only some aspects of the invention may currently be recited as being embodied in a computer-readable medium, other aspects may likewise be so embodied.

Claims (33)

What is claimed is:
1. A computer-implemented method comprising:
obtaining, by one or more computing systems of a collaborative distributed decision system, coupled differential equations that represent a current state of a physical system and that are generated from system information and objective information and sensor information, wherein the physical system has a plurality of inter-related elements and has one or more outputs whose values vary based at least in part on values of one or more manipulatable control elements of the plurality, wherein the system information is supplied by one or more users to describe the physical system and includes multiple rules that each has one or more conditions to evaluate and that specify restrictions involving the plurality of elements, wherein the objective information identifies a goal to be achieved during controlling of the physical system, and wherein the sensor information identifies current state information for at least one element of the plurality and partial initial state information for the physical system at an earlier time;
performing, by the one or more computing systems, a piecewise linear analysis of the coupled differential equations to identify one or more control actions to take in the physical system that manipulate values of the one or more manipulatable control elements and that provide a solution for the goal within a threshold amount of an optimal solution for the goal, wherein the performing of the piecewise linear analysis includes:
dividing a time window from the earlier time to the specified time into a succession of a plurality of time slices that each, other than a first time slice of the succession, overlaps at least in part with a prior time slice of the succession;
evaluating, based on the partial initial state information, the coupled differential equations to identify an initial solution for the goal for the first time slice that includes simulating effects of manipulating the one or more manipulatable control elements to one or more initial values, and storing a model describing a state of the physical system for the first time slice that includes the simulated effects of the manipulating to the one or more initial values;
for each time slice of the succession after the first time slice, updating the stored model for the prior time slice to reflect an additional solution for the goal for the time slice that includes simulating effects of further manipulating the one or more manipulatable control elements to one or more additional values; and
after updating the stored model to reflect the additional solution for the goal for a last time slice of the succession, further updating the stored model for the last time slice to reflect a further solution for the goal for a next time period after the time window based at least in part on the identified current state information, wherein the further solution includes the identified one or more control actions to take in the physical system for a current time; and
providing information about the identified one or more control actions, to enable actions to be taken in the physical system for the current time to affect the outputs based on the identified one or more control actions.
2. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 wherein the physical system is an electricity generating facility, wherein the plurality of inter-related elements include multiple alternative electricity sources within the electricity generating facility, wherein the manipulatable control elements include one or more controls to determine whether to accept a request to supply a specified amount of electricity at the current time and to select which alternative electricity source to provide the specified amount of electricity at the current time if accepted, wherein the outputs include the electricity being provided, and wherein the goal includes to maximize profits for the electricity generating facility from providing of the electricity.
3. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 wherein the physical system is an energy generating facility, wherein the plurality of inter-related elements include at least one energy source within the energy generating facility and at least one energy storage mechanism within the energy generating facility, wherein the manipulatable control elements include one or more controls to determine whether to accept a request to supply a specified amount of energy at the current time and to determine to provide energy to the at least one energy storage mechanism at the current time if not accepted and to provide energy from the at least one energy source at the current time if accepted, wherein the outputs include the energy being provided, and wherein the goal includes to maximize profits for the electricity generating facility from providing of the energy.
4. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 wherein the physical system is a vehicle, wherein the plurality of inter-related elements include a motor and a battery of the vehicle, wherein the manipulatable control elements include one or more controls to select whether at the current time to remove energy from the battery to power the motor or to add excess energy to the battery and how much energy to remove from the battery, wherein the outputs include effects of the motor to move the vehicle at the current time, and wherein the goal includes to move the vehicle at one or more specified speeds with a minimum of energy produced from the battery.
5. The computer-implemented method of claim 4 wherein the plurality of inter-related elements further includes an engine that is manipulatable to modify energy generated from the engine, wherein the manipulatable control elements further include one or more additional controls to determine how much energy to generate from the engine for use at least in part in adding the excess energy to the battery, and wherein the goal further includes to minimize use of fuel by the engine.
6. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 wherein the physical system includes product inventory at one or more locations, wherein the plurality of inter-related elements include one or more product sources that provide products and increase the inventory at the one or more locations and further include one or more product recipients that receive products and decrease the inventory at the one or more locations, wherein the manipulatable control elements include one or more first controls to select at the current time one or more first amounts of one or more products to request from the one or more product sources, and further include one or more second controls to select at the current time one or more second amounts of at least one product to provide to the one or more product recipients, wherein the outputs include products being provided from the one or more locations to the one or more product recipients, and wherein the goal includes to maximize profit of an entity operating the one or more locations while maintaining the inventory at one or more specified levels.
7. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 wherein the stored model for each of the time slices of the succession is expressed with a Hamiltonian function specific to the time slice, and wherein each updating of the stored model for a prior time slice to reflect an additional solution for the goal includes modifying the Hamiltonian function expressed by the stored model for the prior time slice.
8. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 wherein the updated stored model for the last time slice is expressed with a Hamiltonian function, and wherein the further updating of the stored model for the last time slice to reflect the further solution for the goal for the next time period includes modifying the Hamiltonian function based at least in part on the identified current state information.
9. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 wherein the evaluation of the coupled differential equations to identify the initial solution for the goal for the first time slice and the updating for each time slice of the succession after the first time slice of the stored model is performed to train the updated stored model for the last time slice to reflect values of at least some of the plurality of inter-related elements for the current time that include one or more elements whose values are not directly observable, and wherein training of the updated stored model for the last time slice enables the further updating to reflect the further solution for the goal for the next time period.
10. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 further comprising, for each of multiple additional times after the current time, adapting a current copy of the stored model to reflect the additional time by:
obtaining additional sensor information that identifies state information at the additional time for one or more elements of the plurality;
determining, by the one or more computing systems, if an updated copy of the stored model can be generated for the additional time by attempting to identify another solution for the goal for the additional time based at least in part on the additional sensor information, wherein the another solution, if identified, includes one or more further control actions to take in the physical system for the additional time; and
if the updated copy of the stored model can be generated for the additional time, generating and storing the updated copy of the stored model, and providing information about one or more additional control actions to perform in the physical system for the additional time to further manipulate the manipulatable control elements in a specified manner.
11. The computer-implemented method of claim 10 further comprising, for each of the multiple additional times and if the updated copy of the stored model for the additional time is not generated, providing information about one or more further associated control actions to perform in the physical system for that additional time to further manipulate the manipulatable control elements in a specified manner, wherein the one or more further associated control actions are based on the current copy of the stored model before updating for the additional time.
12. The computer-implemented method of claim 11 wherein generating of the updated copy of the stored model for one of the multiple additional times includes a deadline for the generating to enable real-time control of the physical system to be performed based on performing control actions in the physical system for the one additional time, and wherein the generating of the updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time fails to complete before the deadline, such that the one or more further associated control actions for that one additional time are performed in the physical system for that one additional time to further manipulate the manipulatable control elements in a specified manner.
13. The computer-implemented method of claim 10 wherein the updated copy of the stored model for one of the multiple additional times is not generated in a first attempt, and wherein the method further comprises generating the updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time during a second attempt by:
determining, by the one or more computing systems, at least one of the multiple rules to temporarily relax by modifying at least one of the specified restrictions corresponding to the determined at least one rule;
generating, by the one or more computing systems, additional coupled differential equations that represent a current state of the physical system for the one additional time based at least in part on the modified at least one specified restrictions for the determined at least one rule;
performing, by the one or more computing systems, a further piecewise linear analysis of the generated additional coupled differential equations to identify the another solution for the goal for the one additional time,
generating and storing the updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time; and
providing information about the one or more additional control actions of the updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time to perform in the physical system for the one additional time to further manipulate the manipulatable control elements in a specified manner.
14. The computer-implemented method of claim 13 wherein the multiple rules include one or more absolute rules that specify non-modifiable restrictions that are requirements regarding operation of the physical system, and further include one or more hard rules that specify restrictions regarding operation of the physical system that can be modified in specified situations, and wherein each determined at least one rule is one of the hard rules.
15. The computer-implemented method of claim 13 wherein the multiple rules include one or more soft rules whose conditions evaluate to one of three or more possible values under differing situations to represent varying degrees of uncertainty and further include additional rules whose conditions evaluate to either true or false under differing situations, and wherein one or more of the determined at least one rules are from the soft rules.
16. The computer-implemented method of claim 10 wherein the determining if the updated copy of the stored model can be generated for one of the multiple additional times includes generating values for one or more model error measurements based at least in part on the current copy of the stored model for the one additional time, and includes determining that at least one of the generated values exceeds an error threshold, and
wherein the method further comprises generating the updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time by:
evaluating, by the one or more computing systems, the generated values for the one or more model error measurements to determine at least one of the multiple rules that is incorrect;
modifying, by the one or more computing systems, the determined at least one rule in a manner expected to reduce values for the one or more model error measurements;
generating, by the one or more computing systems, additional coupled differential equations that represent a current state of the physical system for the one additional time based at least in part on the modified determined at least one rule;
performing, by the one or more computing systems, a further piecewise linear analysis of the generated additional coupled differential equations to identify the another solution for the goal for the one additional time,
generating and storing the updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time; and
providing information about the one or more additional control actions of the updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time to perform in the physical system for the one additional time to further manipulate the manipulatable control elements in a specified manner.
17. The computer-implemented method of claim 16 wherein the another solution identified for the goal for two or more of the additional times each has an associated error measurement within a defined threshold relative to an optimal solution for the goal for that additional time, and wherein the one or more model error measurements are based on a rate of change of one or more of:
Hamiltonian functions expressed by two or more copies of the model for two or more times;
amounts of entropy included in two or more copies of the model for two or more times;
values of variables associated with the plurality of inter-related elements in state information for the physical system for two or more times; or
a reduction in the associated error measurements for the another solutions for the two or more additional times.
18. The computer-implemented method of claim 10 wherein the determining if the updated copy of the stored model can be generated for one of the multiple additional times includes:
generating, by the one or more computing systems, the updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time;
generating, by the one or more computing systems, values for one or more model error measurements for the generated updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time;
determining, by the one or more computing systems, that at least one of the generated values exceeds an error threshold; and
replacing, by the one or more computing systems, the generated updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time with a new generated updated copy of the stored model for the one additional time, by causing a new copy of the model for the one additional time to be generated without using any past copies of the model, and storing the generated new copy of the model for the one additional time.
19. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 further comprising modifying the multiple rules during one of the multiple additional times, and wherein updating of copies of the stored model after the one additional time includes using the modified rules.
20. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 further comprising, before the dividing of the time window into the succession of time slices, determining, by the one or more computing systems, at least one of a size of the time slices or a size of the time window.
21. The computer-implemented method of claim 20 wherein the determining of the at least one of the size of the time slices or the size of the time window includes evaluating multiple test sizes for the at least one of the size of the time slices or the size of the time window, and selecting, based at least in part on the evaluating, one or more of the multiple sizes to use for the determined at least one size of the time slices or size of the time window.
22. The computer-implemented method of claim 20 further comprising generating a Hamiltonian function to express a copy of the model of the state of the physical system before the dividing of the time window into the succession of time slices, and wherein the determining of the at least one of the size of the time slices or the size of the time window includes performing a symbolic computation analysis of the Hamiltonian function to identify one or more preferred sizes to use for the determined at least one size of the time slices or size of the time window.
23. The computer-implemented method of claim 1 wherein the providing of the information about the identified one or more control actions includes performing, by the one or more computing systems, the actions in the physical system to affect the outputs by manipulating the manipulatable control elements in specified manners for the identified one or more control actions.
24. A non-transitory computer-readable medium having stored contents that cause one or more computing systems to perform a method, the method comprising:
obtaining, by the one or more computing systems, coupled differential equations that represent a state of a target system at a specified time and that are generated from system information and objective information and sensor information, wherein the target system has a plurality of elements that are inter-related and that include one or more control elements with modifiable values, wherein the system information is supplied by one or more users to describe the physical system and includes restrictions involving the plurality of elements, wherein the objective information identifies a goal to be achieved based at least in part on modifying the values of the control elements, and wherein the sensor information identifies state information for the specified time for at least one element of the plurality;
performing, by the one or more computing systems, a piecewise linear analysis of the coupled differential equations to identify a solution for the goal for the specified time within a threshold amount of an optimal solution for the goal, wherein the identified solution has one or more associated control actions that modify at least one value of at least one of the control elements in a specified manner, and wherein the performing of the piecewise linear analysis includes:
dividing a time window from an earlier time to the specified time into a succession of a plurality of time slices;
evaluating, based on initial state information for the earlier time, the coupled differential equations to identify an initial solution for the goal for a first time slice of the succession that includes simulating effects of modifying one or more values of the one or more manipulatable control elements in a specified initial manner, and storing a model describing a state of the target system for the first time slice that includes the simulated effects of the modifying of the one or more values;
for each time slice of the succession after the first time slice, updating the stored model for a prior time slice to reflect an additional solution for the goal for the time slice that includes simulating effects of further modifying one or more values of the one or more manipulatable control elements; and
after updating the stored model to reflect the additional solution for the goal for a last time slice of the succession, further updating the stored model for the last time slice to reflect a further solution for the goal for a next time period after the time window based at least in part on the identified state information for the specified time, wherein the further solution includes the one or more associated control actions; and
providing information about the one or more associated control actions, to enable modification of the at least one value of the at least one control element for the specified time based on the one or more associated control actions.
25. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 24 wherein the target system is a physical system having one or more outputs whose values vary based at least in part on the values of the control elements, wherein the one or more computing systems are part of a collaborative distributed decision system, and wherein the stored contents include software instructions that, when executed, further cause the one or more computing systems to initiate performance of the one or more associated control actions in the physical system to modify the at least one value of the at least one control element and to cause resulting changes in the values of the one or more outputs for the specified time.
26. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 24 wherein the target system includes one or more computing resources being protected from unauthorized operations, wherein the plurality of inter-related elements include one or more sources of attempts to perform operations, wherein the control elements include one or more controls to determine whether a change in authorization to a specified type of operation is needed and to select one or more actions to take to implement the change in authorization if so determined, and wherein the goal includes to minimize unauthorized operations that are performed.
27. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 24 wherein the target system includes one or more information sources to be analyzed to determine a risk level from information of the one or more information sources, wherein the control elements include one or more controls to determine whether the risk level exceeds a specified threshold and to select one or more actions to take to mitigate the risk level, and wherein the goal includes to minimize the risk level.
28. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 24 wherein the target system includes one or more financial markets, wherein the plurality of inter-related elements include items that can be purchased and/or sold in the one or more financial markets, wherein the control elements include one or more controls to determine whether to purchase or sell particular items at particular times and to select one or more actions to initiate transactions to purchase or sell the particular items at the particular times, and wherein the goal includes to maximize profit while maintaining risk below a specified threshold.
29. The non-transitory computer-readable medium of claim 24 wherein the target system includes functionality to perform coding for medical procedures performed on humans, wherein the plurality of inter-related elements include a plurality of medical codes corresponding to a plurality of medical procedures, wherein the control elements include one or more controls to select particular medical codes to associate with particular medical procedures in specified circumstances, and wherein the goal includes to minimize errors in selected medical codes that cause revenue leakage.
30. A system comprising:
one or more processors of one or more computing systems; and
one or more modules that, when executed by at least one of the one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to determine one or more control actions to perform as part of controlling a physical system, the determining of the one or more control actions including:
obtaining coupled differential equations that represent a state of a physical system for a specified time and that are generated from system information and objective information and sensor information, wherein the physical system has a plurality of inter-related elements and has one or more outputs whose values vary based at least in part on values of one or more manipulatable control elements of the plurality, wherein the system information is supplied by one or more users to describe the physical system and includes restrictions involving the plurality of elements, wherein the objective information identifies a goal to be achieved during controlling of the physical system, and wherein the sensor information identifies state information for the specified time for at least one element of the plurality;
performing a first piecewise linear analysis of the coupled differential equations to train a model that describes a state of the physical system for the specified time and that includes values of at least some of the plurality of elements for the specified time, wherein the performing of the first piecewise linear analysis includes simulating effects of manipulating the one or more manipulatable control elements for each of one or more prior time periods before the specified time while satisfying the goal for the one or more prior time periods;
performing a second piecewise linear analysis of the coupled differential equations to identify one or more control actions to take in the physical system for the specified time that manipulate values of the one or more manipulatable control elements and that provide a solution for the goal for the specified time, wherein the performing of the piecewise linear analysis includes updating the model to reflect the solution for the goal for the specified time period based at least in part on the identified state information for the specified time; and
providing information about the identified one or more control actions, to enable actions to be taken in the physical system for the specified time to affect the outputs based on the identified one or more control actions.
31. The system of claim 30 wherein the one or more modules are part of a collaborative distributed decision system and include software instructions for execution by the at least one processor, wherein the provided solution reflected in the updated model is within a threshold amount of an optimal solution for the goal for the specified time, and wherein the system further comprises one or more effectuators to perform the actions in the physical system for the specified time by manipulating the values of the one or more manipulatable control elements in specified manners for the identified one or more control actions to affect the outputs.
32. The system of claim 31 wherein the performing of the first piecewise linear analysis of the coupled differential equations to train the model further includes:
for a time window from an earlier time to the specified time that includes the one or more prior time periods, dividing the time window into a succession of a plurality of time slices that each, other than a first time slice of the succession, overlaps at least in part with a prior time slice of the succession;
evaluating, based on initial state information for the earlier time, an initial version of the coupled differential equations to identify an initial solution for the goal for the first time slice that includes simulating effects of manipulating the one or more manipulatable control elements to one or more initial values, and storing an initial version of the model that describes the state of the physical system for the first time slice and includes the simulated effects of the manipulating to the one or more initial values; and
for each time slice of the succession after the first time slice, updating a version of the stored model from the prior time slice to reflect an additional solution for the goal for the time slice that includes simulating effects of further manipulating the one or more manipulatable control elements to one or more additional values, and
wherein the trained model is a version of the model after the updating to reflect the additional solution for the goal for a last time slice of the succession.
33. The system of claim 30 wherein the one or more modules consist of one or more means for performing the determining of the one or more control actions to perform as part of controlling the physical system.
US14/746,751 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Determining control actions of decision modules Abandoned US20150370228A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/746,751 US20150370228A1 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Determining control actions of decision modules

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201462015018P 2014-06-20 2014-06-20
US14/746,751 US20150370228A1 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Determining control actions of decision modules

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20150370228A1 true US20150370228A1 (en) 2015-12-24

Family

ID=54869548

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/746,759 Active 2036-07-13 US10082778B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Managing coordinated control by multiple decision modules
US14/746,777 Active 2036-09-13 US10133250B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Managing construction of decision modules to control target systems
US14/746,751 Abandoned US20150370228A1 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Determining control actions of decision modules
US14/746,738 Abandoned US20160004228A1 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Cooperative distributed control of target systems
US16/001,858 Active 2038-10-14 US11518255B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2018-06-06 Determining control actions of decision modules
US16/155,816 Active 2036-06-13 US11052772B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2018-10-09 Cooperative distributed control of target systems

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/746,759 Active 2036-07-13 US10082778B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Managing coordinated control by multiple decision modules
US14/746,777 Active 2036-09-13 US10133250B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Managing construction of decision modules to control target systems

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/746,738 Abandoned US20160004228A1 (en) 2014-06-20 2015-06-22 Cooperative distributed control of target systems
US16/001,858 Active 2038-10-14 US11518255B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2018-06-06 Determining control actions of decision modules
US16/155,816 Active 2036-06-13 US11052772B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2018-10-09 Cooperative distributed control of target systems

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (6) US10082778B2 (en)
EP (1) EP3158408A4 (en)
WO (1) WO2016025080A1 (en)

Cited By (38)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160018806A1 (en) * 2014-06-20 2016-01-21 Atigeo Corp. Managing construction of decision modules to control target systems
US20160188904A1 (en) * 2014-12-31 2016-06-30 Reliance Jio Infocomm Limited Method and system of privacy protection in antagonistic social milieu/dark privacy spots
WO2017042780A1 (en) * 2016-07-20 2017-03-16 Universidad Tecnológica De Panamá System and method for the detection of alerts and correction of errors in industrial processes
US9639630B1 (en) * 2016-02-18 2017-05-02 Guidanz Inc. System for business intelligence data integration
US20170248091A1 (en) * 2014-11-17 2017-08-31 Volkswagen Aktiengesellschaft Control unit for a combustion engine
US20170277908A1 (en) * 2016-03-22 2017-09-28 Ca, Inc. Providing data privacy in computer networks using personally identifiable information by inference control
CN108133290A (en) * 2017-12-21 2018-06-08 北京中交兴路信源科技有限公司 A kind of preferential dispatching method of timeliness and system
US10061316B2 (en) * 2016-07-08 2018-08-28 Toyota Motor Engineering & Manufacturing North America, Inc. Control policy learning and vehicle control method based on reinforcement learning without active exploration
US10065654B2 (en) * 2016-07-08 2018-09-04 Toyota Motor Engineering & Manufacturing North America, Inc. Online learning and vehicle control method based on reinforcement learning without active exploration
US10235686B2 (en) * 2014-10-30 2019-03-19 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc System forecasting and improvement using mean field
US20190260832A1 (en) * 2018-02-16 2019-08-22 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Information processing apparatus and non-transitory computer readable medium
US20190265713A1 (en) * 2016-06-08 2019-08-29 Uisee Technologies (Beijing) Ltd Speed planning method and apparatus and calculating apparatus for automatic driving of vehicle
US10452045B1 (en) * 2018-11-30 2019-10-22 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Controlling ongoing battery system usage while repeatedly reducing power dissipation
WO2020023998A1 (en) * 2018-07-29 2020-02-06 Nova Professional Services Pty Ltd Improvements to operational state determination and modification
CN110766239A (en) * 2019-11-05 2020-02-07 深圳供电局有限公司 Micro-grid optimization scheduling method based on firework algorithm
US10587729B1 (en) * 2016-10-28 2020-03-10 Vignet Incorporated System and method for rules engine that dynamically adapts application behavior
US10601316B2 (en) 2016-03-04 2020-03-24 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using battery DC characteristics to control power output
US10666076B1 (en) 2018-08-14 2020-05-26 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using battery state excitation to control battery operations
US20200252452A1 (en) * 2019-01-31 2020-08-06 EMC IP Holding Company LLC Extended group service changes
CN111724052A (en) * 2020-06-12 2020-09-29 大连海事大学 Intelligent evaluation system for ship turbine simulator
US10816949B1 (en) * 2019-01-22 2020-10-27 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Managing coordinated improvement of control operations for multiple electrical devices to reduce power dissipation
CN112036681A (en) * 2020-07-09 2020-12-04 华电电力科学研究院有限公司 Cascade hydropower station aggregation dimension reduction compensation benefit distribution method based on cooperative play and comprehensive empowerment
US20210157315A1 (en) * 2019-11-26 2021-05-27 Nissan North America, Inc. Risk Aware Executor with Action Set Recommendations
US11069926B1 (en) 2019-02-14 2021-07-20 Vcritonc Alpha, Inc. Controlling ongoing battery system usage via parametric linear approximation
US11097633B1 (en) 2019-01-24 2021-08-24 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using battery state excitation to model and control battery operations
CN113785045A (en) * 2019-02-15 2021-12-10 贾斯特-埃沃泰克生物制品有限公司 Facility and method for producing biotherapeutic agents
US11372384B2 (en) * 2019-09-17 2022-06-28 General Electric Company System and method for adjusting a multi-dimensional operating space of a wind turbine
US11407327B1 (en) 2019-10-17 2022-08-09 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Controlling ongoing usage of a battery cell having one or more internal supercapacitors and an internal battery
US11613269B2 (en) 2019-12-23 2023-03-28 Nissan North America, Inc. Learning safety and human-centered constraints in autonomous vehicles
WO2023066073A1 (en) * 2021-10-24 2023-04-27 International Business Machines Corporation Distributed computing for dynamic generation of optimal and interpretable prescriptive policies with interdependent constraints
US11644806B1 (en) 2019-01-24 2023-05-09 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using active non-destructive state excitation of a physical system to model and control operations of the physical system
US11702070B2 (en) 2017-10-31 2023-07-18 Nissan North America, Inc. Autonomous vehicle operation with explicit occlusion reasoning
US11714971B2 (en) 2020-01-31 2023-08-01 Nissan North America, Inc. Explainability of autonomous vehicle decision making
US11782438B2 (en) 2020-03-17 2023-10-10 Nissan North America, Inc. Apparatus and method for post-processing a decision-making model of an autonomous vehicle using multivariate data
US11874120B2 (en) 2017-12-22 2024-01-16 Nissan North America, Inc. Shared autonomous vehicle operational management
WO2024011955A1 (en) * 2022-07-11 2024-01-18 北京极智嘉科技股份有限公司 Robotic fleet scheduling method for warehousing system, warehousing system, and scheduling device thereof
US11892809B2 (en) 2021-07-26 2024-02-06 Veritone, Inc. Controlling operation of an electrical grid using reinforcement learning and multi-particle modeling
US11899454B2 (en) 2019-11-26 2024-02-13 Nissan North America, Inc. Objective-based reasoning in autonomous vehicle decision-making

Families Citing this family (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10360394B2 (en) 2015-11-18 2019-07-23 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for creating, tracking, and maintaining big data use cases
US10055426B2 (en) 2015-11-18 2018-08-21 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method transforming source data into output data in big data environments
US10169601B2 (en) 2015-11-18 2019-01-01 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for reading and writing to big data storage formats
US10037329B2 (en) 2015-11-18 2018-07-31 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. System and method for automatically capturing and recording lineage data for big data records
US10445324B2 (en) 2015-11-18 2019-10-15 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Systems and methods for tracking sensitive data in a big data environment
US10055471B2 (en) 2015-11-18 2018-08-21 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Integrated big data interface for multiple storage types
US10055444B2 (en) 2015-12-16 2018-08-21 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Systems and methods for access control over changing big data structures
US11550632B2 (en) * 2015-12-24 2023-01-10 Intel Corporation Facilitating efficient communication and data processing across clusters of computing machines in heterogeneous computing environment
CN105843736B (en) * 2016-03-18 2021-04-06 中国电力科学研究院 Test method of power system state estimation software
KR102237654B1 (en) * 2016-04-28 2021-04-09 베리톤 알파, 인코포레이티드 Predictive use to control target systems
US10303131B2 (en) * 2016-05-13 2019-05-28 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using sensor data to assist in controlling a target system by modeling the functionality of the target system
US10776846B2 (en) * 2016-07-27 2020-09-15 Nike, Inc. Assortment optimization
JP6466385B2 (en) * 2016-10-11 2019-02-06 本田技研工業株式会社 Service providing apparatus, service providing method, and service providing program
CN106527129B (en) * 2016-10-18 2019-08-27 长安大学 A kind of parallel robot Fuzzy indirect adaptive control determination method for parameter
US10516269B2 (en) 2016-11-16 2019-12-24 Alliance For Sustainable Energy, Llc Real time feedback-based optimization of distributed energy resources
US11295326B2 (en) 2017-01-31 2022-04-05 American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. Insights on a data platform
CN108574570B (en) 2017-03-08 2022-05-17 华为技术有限公司 Private key generation method, device and system
US10783287B2 (en) * 2017-06-14 2020-09-22 International Business Machines Corporation Employing natural language processing to facilitate geospatial analysis
US10606669B2 (en) 2018-06-08 2020-03-31 Optum, Inc. Domain and event type-specific consensus process for a distributed ledger
EP3830651A4 (en) 2018-07-31 2022-04-27 Alliance for Sustainable Energy, LLC Distributed reinforcement learning and consensus control of energy systems
CN109345001A (en) * 2018-09-07 2019-02-15 山东师范大学 The unbalance method of adjustment of shared bicycle website and system based on Pareto multiobjective selection
CN109241191B (en) * 2018-09-13 2021-09-14 华东交通大学 Distributed data source heterogeneous synchronization platform and synchronization method
CN109449981B (en) * 2018-11-22 2021-06-08 清华大学 Distributed frequency control stability judgment method considering communication delay
CN109828460B (en) * 2019-01-21 2021-11-12 南京理工大学 Output consistency control method for bidirectional heterogeneous multi-agent system
US20220146992A1 (en) * 2019-01-25 2022-05-12 Andrew Gilbert Miller Method, System, and Computer Program Product for Autonomous Control of Dynamical Systems
US20200279136A1 (en) * 2019-03-01 2020-09-03 Royal Bank Of Canada System and method for multi-type mean field reinforcement machine learning
US11321307B2 (en) 2019-06-25 2022-05-03 Optum, Inc. Orchestrated consensus validation for distributed ledgers using heterogeneous validation pools
CN110758121B (en) * 2019-11-13 2021-06-04 北京理工大学 Energy management system based on hierarchical control
WO2022069954A1 (en) * 2020-10-01 2022-04-07 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Cell multi-agent coordination in shared control elements
CN112213984B (en) * 2020-10-23 2021-08-10 广州汇德数控科技有限公司 Household electrical appliance monitoring equipment based on cloud system
CN112311791B (en) * 2020-10-29 2023-04-14 贵州电网有限责任公司 Statistical method and system suitable for office business flow

Family Cites Families (54)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US816949A (en) * 1905-09-26 1906-04-03 John Stewart Chimney-fastener for lamps.
US5040123A (en) 1989-09-08 1991-08-13 General Motors Corporation Expert system scheduler
JPH08123507A (en) 1994-10-27 1996-05-17 Fujitsu Ltd Robust controller
US6088689A (en) 1995-11-29 2000-07-11 Hynomics Corporation Multiple-agent hybrid control architecture for intelligent real-time control of distributed nonlinear processes
US5727128A (en) 1996-05-08 1998-03-10 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. System and method for automatically determining a set of variables for use in creating a process model
US6581048B1 (en) 1996-06-04 2003-06-17 Paul J. Werbos 3-brain architecture for an intelligent decision and control system
US5963447A (en) * 1997-08-22 1999-10-05 Hynomics Corporation Multiple-agent hybrid control architecture for intelligent real-time control of distributed nonlinear processes
US6157864A (en) 1998-05-08 2000-12-05 Rockwell Technologies, Llc System, method and article of manufacture for displaying an animated, realtime updated control sequence chart
US6694044B1 (en) 1999-09-16 2004-02-17 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method for motion classification using switching linear dynamic system models
WO2002025528A1 (en) * 2000-09-21 2002-03-28 Theradoc.Com, Inc. Systems and methods for manipulating medical data via a decision support system
US7574383B1 (en) * 2001-04-11 2009-08-11 I2 Technologies Us, Inc. System and method for providing distributed inventory management
US20030069868A1 (en) * 2001-06-29 2003-04-10 Vos Jules Jakob Distributed decision processing system
WO2003067448A1 (en) 2002-02-02 2003-08-14 E-Wings, Inc. Distributed system for interactive collaboration
US7072808B2 (en) * 2002-02-04 2006-07-04 Tuszynski Steve W Manufacturing design and process analysis system
US7216071B2 (en) 2002-04-23 2007-05-08 United Technologies Corporation Hybrid gas turbine engine state variable model
US20030234812A1 (en) * 2002-06-24 2003-12-25 Drucker Steven M. Visual decision maker
US7072723B2 (en) * 2002-10-23 2006-07-04 Clearsight Systems Inc. Method and system for optimization of general problems
US20050114105A1 (en) 2003-11-24 2005-05-26 Barber Andrew J. System for predicting the dynamic behavior of physical systems
US7739183B2 (en) * 2004-06-03 2010-06-15 Voudrie Jeffrey D Real-time client portfolio management system
WO2006058041A2 (en) 2004-11-23 2006-06-01 Clearsight Systems Inc. Automated trading platform
US8261283B2 (en) * 2005-02-16 2012-09-04 Yissum Research Development Company Of Hebrew University Of Jerusalem System and method for backfilling with system-generated predictions rather than user runtime estimates
US7565333B2 (en) 2005-04-08 2009-07-21 Caterpillar Inc. Control system and method
WO2008086114A2 (en) * 2007-01-03 2008-07-17 Gridpoint, Inc. Utility console for controlling energy resources
US9721312B2 (en) 2007-03-21 2017-08-01 Steven Y. Goldsmith Customized electric power storage device for inclusion in a microgrid
US8065037B2 (en) 2007-08-07 2011-11-22 Board Of Regents Of The Nevada System Of Higher Education, On Behalf Of The University Of Nevada, Reno Control method and system for hydraulic machines employing a dynamic joint motion model
MX2011006340A (en) 2008-12-12 2011-10-28 Atigeo Llc Providing recommendations using information determined for domains of interest.
US8949772B1 (en) * 2009-06-01 2015-02-03 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Dynamic model based software application development
US8558712B2 (en) 2010-06-03 2013-10-15 C&C Power, Inc. Battery system and management method
US8606788B2 (en) * 2011-06-15 2013-12-10 Microsoft Corporation Dictionary for hierarchical attributes from catalog items
US9496748B2 (en) 2011-10-25 2016-11-15 General Electric Company Integrated power system control method and related apparatus with energy storage element
US8816627B2 (en) * 2011-11-10 2014-08-26 Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. Energy efficient motion control system
US20130253942A1 (en) 2012-03-22 2013-09-26 Hong Kong Baptist University Methods and Apparatus for Smart Healthcare Decision Analytics and Support
US20130274936A1 (en) * 2012-04-15 2013-10-17 Swan, Llc Broadcast energy demand systems and methods
JP6308131B2 (en) * 2012-08-23 2018-04-11 日本電気株式会社 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, ENERGY MANAGEMENT METHOD, SERVER DEVICE AND TERMINAL DEVICE USING THE ENERGY MANAGEMENT METHOD
JP5575203B2 (en) * 2012-10-24 2014-08-20 三菱電機株式会社 Vehicle power generation apparatus and power generation control method
CN103036230B (en) * 2012-12-10 2016-03-23 上海市电力公司 A kind of Dynamic Equivalence of the alternating current-direct current series-parallel connection bulk power grid based on engineer applied
US20140250377A1 (en) 2013-03-04 2014-09-04 Atigeo Llc Method and system for searching and analyzing large numbers of electronic documents
US9400491B2 (en) * 2013-03-15 2016-07-26 Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. Stabilized deteministic optimization based control system and method
US9869724B2 (en) 2013-07-24 2018-01-16 Rohm Co., Ltd. Power management system
US20150058078A1 (en) 2013-08-26 2015-02-26 Microsoft Corporation Rule to constraint translator for business application systems
RU2578759C2 (en) * 2013-09-06 2016-03-27 Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Кибернетические Технологии" Control device in cyber-physical systems, primarily for controlling mobile robots and/or unmanned aerial vehicles
US9581981B2 (en) 2014-03-06 2017-02-28 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Method and apparatus for preconditioned continuation model predictive control
US10186123B2 (en) * 2014-04-01 2019-01-22 Avigilon Fortress Corporation Complex event recognition in a sensor network
US10082778B2 (en) * 2014-06-20 2018-09-25 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Managing coordinated control by multiple decision modules
US20160125435A1 (en) 2014-10-31 2016-05-05 Microsoft Technology Licensing , LLC Interrogation of mean field system
US20170271984A1 (en) * 2016-03-04 2017-09-21 Atigeo Corp. Using battery dc characteristics to control power output
US10140585B2 (en) 2016-04-01 2018-11-27 Demand Energy Networks, Inc. Control systems and methods for economical optimization of an electrical system including battery degradation
US20170315517A1 (en) 2016-04-28 2017-11-02 Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods to reduce energy usage of industrial machines using an enhanced motion profile
KR102237654B1 (en) 2016-04-28 2021-04-09 베리톤 알파, 인코포레이티드 Predictive use to control target systems
US10303131B2 (en) * 2016-05-13 2019-05-28 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using sensor data to assist in controlling a target system by modeling the functionality of the target system
US10170911B1 (en) * 2016-08-25 2019-01-01 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Providing phase synchronization and harmonic harvesting
US10666076B1 (en) * 2018-08-14 2020-05-26 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using battery state excitation to control battery operations
US10452045B1 (en) * 2018-11-30 2019-10-22 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Controlling ongoing battery system usage while repeatedly reducing power dissipation
US10816949B1 (en) * 2019-01-22 2020-10-27 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Managing coordinated improvement of control operations for multiple electrical devices to reduce power dissipation

Cited By (51)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160018806A1 (en) * 2014-06-20 2016-01-21 Atigeo Corp. Managing construction of decision modules to control target systems
US11518255B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2022-12-06 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Determining control actions of decision modules
US11052772B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2021-07-06 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Cooperative distributed control of target systems
US10133250B2 (en) * 2014-06-20 2018-11-20 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Managing construction of decision modules to control target systems
US10235686B2 (en) * 2014-10-30 2019-03-19 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc System forecasting and improvement using mean field
US10690075B2 (en) * 2014-11-17 2020-06-23 Volkswagen Aktiengesellschaft Control unit for a combustion engine
US20170248091A1 (en) * 2014-11-17 2017-08-31 Volkswagen Aktiengesellschaft Control unit for a combustion engine
US20160188904A1 (en) * 2014-12-31 2016-06-30 Reliance Jio Infocomm Limited Method and system of privacy protection in antagonistic social milieu/dark privacy spots
US9959425B2 (en) * 2014-12-31 2018-05-01 Reliance Jio Infocomm Limited Method and system of privacy protection in antagonistic social milieu/dark privacy spots
US9639630B1 (en) * 2016-02-18 2017-05-02 Guidanz Inc. System for business intelligence data integration
US10601316B2 (en) 2016-03-04 2020-03-24 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using battery DC characteristics to control power output
US9977920B2 (en) * 2016-03-22 2018-05-22 Ca, Inc. Providing data privacy in computer networks using personally identifiable information by inference control
US20170277908A1 (en) * 2016-03-22 2017-09-28 Ca, Inc. Providing data privacy in computer networks using personally identifiable information by inference control
US10564644B2 (en) * 2016-06-08 2020-02-18 Uisee Technologies (Beijing) Ltd Speed planning method and apparatus and calculating apparatus for automatic driving of vehicle
US20190265713A1 (en) * 2016-06-08 2019-08-29 Uisee Technologies (Beijing) Ltd Speed planning method and apparatus and calculating apparatus for automatic driving of vehicle
US10065654B2 (en) * 2016-07-08 2018-09-04 Toyota Motor Engineering & Manufacturing North America, Inc. Online learning and vehicle control method based on reinforcement learning without active exploration
US10061316B2 (en) * 2016-07-08 2018-08-28 Toyota Motor Engineering & Manufacturing North America, Inc. Control policy learning and vehicle control method based on reinforcement learning without active exploration
WO2017042780A1 (en) * 2016-07-20 2017-03-16 Universidad Tecnológica De Panamá System and method for the detection of alerts and correction of errors in industrial processes
US11487531B2 (en) 2016-10-28 2022-11-01 Vignet Incorporated Customizing applications for health monitoring using rules and program data
US10587729B1 (en) * 2016-10-28 2020-03-10 Vignet Incorporated System and method for rules engine that dynamically adapts application behavior
US11321082B2 (en) 2016-10-28 2022-05-03 Vignet Incorporated Patient engagement in digital health programs
US11702070B2 (en) 2017-10-31 2023-07-18 Nissan North America, Inc. Autonomous vehicle operation with explicit occlusion reasoning
CN108133290A (en) * 2017-12-21 2018-06-08 北京中交兴路信源科技有限公司 A kind of preferential dispatching method of timeliness and system
US11874120B2 (en) 2017-12-22 2024-01-16 Nissan North America, Inc. Shared autonomous vehicle operational management
US10992756B2 (en) * 2018-02-16 2021-04-27 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Information processing apparatus and non-transitory computer readable medium generating a notification including a warning
US20190260832A1 (en) * 2018-02-16 2019-08-22 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Information processing apparatus and non-transitory computer readable medium
WO2020023998A1 (en) * 2018-07-29 2020-02-06 Nova Professional Services Pty Ltd Improvements to operational state determination and modification
US10666076B1 (en) 2018-08-14 2020-05-26 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using battery state excitation to control battery operations
US10969757B1 (en) 2018-11-30 2021-04-06 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Controlling ongoing battery system usage while repeatedly reducing power dissipation
US10452045B1 (en) * 2018-11-30 2019-10-22 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Controlling ongoing battery system usage while repeatedly reducing power dissipation
US10816949B1 (en) * 2019-01-22 2020-10-27 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Managing coordinated improvement of control operations for multiple electrical devices to reduce power dissipation
US11644806B1 (en) 2019-01-24 2023-05-09 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using active non-destructive state excitation of a physical system to model and control operations of the physical system
US11097633B1 (en) 2019-01-24 2021-08-24 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Using battery state excitation to model and control battery operations
US20200252452A1 (en) * 2019-01-31 2020-08-06 EMC IP Holding Company LLC Extended group service changes
US10938897B2 (en) * 2019-01-31 2021-03-02 EMC IP Holding Company LLC Extended group service changes
US11069926B1 (en) 2019-02-14 2021-07-20 Vcritonc Alpha, Inc. Controlling ongoing battery system usage via parametric linear approximation
CN113785045A (en) * 2019-02-15 2021-12-10 贾斯特-埃沃泰克生物制品有限公司 Facility and method for producing biotherapeutic agents
US11372384B2 (en) * 2019-09-17 2022-06-28 General Electric Company System and method for adjusting a multi-dimensional operating space of a wind turbine
US11407327B1 (en) 2019-10-17 2022-08-09 Veritone Alpha, Inc. Controlling ongoing usage of a battery cell having one or more internal supercapacitors and an internal battery
CN110766239A (en) * 2019-11-05 2020-02-07 深圳供电局有限公司 Micro-grid optimization scheduling method based on firework algorithm
US20210157315A1 (en) * 2019-11-26 2021-05-27 Nissan North America, Inc. Risk Aware Executor with Action Set Recommendations
US11635758B2 (en) * 2019-11-26 2023-04-25 Nissan North America, Inc. Risk aware executor with action set recommendations
US11899454B2 (en) 2019-11-26 2024-02-13 Nissan North America, Inc. Objective-based reasoning in autonomous vehicle decision-making
US11613269B2 (en) 2019-12-23 2023-03-28 Nissan North America, Inc. Learning safety and human-centered constraints in autonomous vehicles
US11714971B2 (en) 2020-01-31 2023-08-01 Nissan North America, Inc. Explainability of autonomous vehicle decision making
US11782438B2 (en) 2020-03-17 2023-10-10 Nissan North America, Inc. Apparatus and method for post-processing a decision-making model of an autonomous vehicle using multivariate data
CN111724052A (en) * 2020-06-12 2020-09-29 大连海事大学 Intelligent evaluation system for ship turbine simulator
CN112036681A (en) * 2020-07-09 2020-12-04 华电电力科学研究院有限公司 Cascade hydropower station aggregation dimension reduction compensation benefit distribution method based on cooperative play and comprehensive empowerment
US11892809B2 (en) 2021-07-26 2024-02-06 Veritone, Inc. Controlling operation of an electrical grid using reinforcement learning and multi-particle modeling
WO2023066073A1 (en) * 2021-10-24 2023-04-27 International Business Machines Corporation Distributed computing for dynamic generation of optimal and interpretable prescriptive policies with interdependent constraints
WO2024011955A1 (en) * 2022-07-11 2024-01-18 北京极智嘉科技股份有限公司 Robotic fleet scheduling method for warehousing system, warehousing system, and scheduling device thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US11518255B2 (en) 2022-12-06
WO2016025080A1 (en) 2016-02-18
US20150370232A1 (en) 2015-12-24
US10133250B2 (en) 2018-11-20
US20180356783A1 (en) 2018-12-13
EP3158408A1 (en) 2017-04-26
US10082778B2 (en) 2018-09-25
US20160004228A1 (en) 2016-01-07
EP3158408A4 (en) 2017-05-10
US20160018806A1 (en) 2016-01-21
US11052772B2 (en) 2021-07-06
US20190041817A1 (en) 2019-02-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10133250B2 (en) Managing construction of decision modules to control target systems
US20170271984A1 (en) Using battery dc characteristics to control power output
US11836473B2 (en) Active adaptation of networked compute devices using vetted reusable software components
Gong et al. Evolutionary algorithms with preference polyhedron for interval multi-objective optimization problems
Wu Linking Bayesian networks and PLS path modeling for causal analysis
US10007884B2 (en) Quantum state dynamics in a community of subjects assigned quantum states modulo a proposition perceived in a social value context
US20160004972A1 (en) Marketing to a community of subjects assigned quantum states modulo a proposition perceived in a social value context
US20140164313A1 (en) Method and Apparatus for Predicting Subject Responses to a Proposition based on Quantum Representation of the Subject&#39;s Internal State and of the Proposition
Cordero et al. A conversational recommender system for diagnosis using fuzzy rules
US9741081B2 (en) Perturbing a subject&#39;s contextualization of a proposition about an item considered in a quantum representation by altering the item
US20150026112A1 (en) Renormalization-Related deployment of a quantum representation for tracking measurable indications generated by test subjects while contextualizing propositions
Liu et al. A hybrid quantum-classical conditional generative adversarial network algorithm for human-centered paradigm in cloud
Popescu et al. Knowledge representation and reasoning using interconnected uncertain rules for describing workflows in complex systems
Krishankumar et al. An integrated decision model for cloud vendor selection using probabilistic linguistic information and unknown weights
WO2023009447A1 (en) Controlling operation of an electrical grid using reinforcement learning and multi-particle modeling
CN111680798A (en) Joint learning model system and method, apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium
Yue et al. Challenges and Opportunities in Quantum Software Architecture
Mahroo et al. Learning Infused Quantum-Classical Distributed Optimization Technique for Power Generation Scheduling
Wen et al. Variational Counterfactual Prediction under Runtime Domain Corruption
Kavarakuntla Performance modelling for scalable deep learning
d’Hondt Federated learning over local learning: an opportunity for collaboration
Gonzaga et al. A probabilistic algorithm to predict missing facts from knowledge graphs
Krüger et al. Insite: a pipeline enabling in-transit visualization and analysis for neuronal network simulations
Tan et al. The dual interactions-driven consensus model: Probing the non-cooperative behavior through order effects
Chen Advanced Phenomenology for Indirect New Physics Searches

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ATIGEO CORP., WASHINGTON

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:KOHN, WOLF, DR.;SANDOVAL, MICHAEL LUIS;VETTRIVEL, VISHNU;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20150625 TO 20150726;REEL/FRAME:036626/0575

AS Assignment

Owner name: VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VII, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:ATIGEO CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:036995/0017

Effective date: 20151109

Owner name: VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VI, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:ATIGEO CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:036995/0017

Effective date: 20151109

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: VERITONE ALPHA, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:ATIGEO CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:046302/0883

Effective date: 20171219